JP6265252B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example. In a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, when the start condition is satisfied (for example, winning a ball at the start opening), the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display screen, and the change display stops. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of symbols determined in advance, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In such gaming machines, various effects (for example, a notice effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, etc.) are performed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In recent years, various effects have been performed using a large number of electrical components (for example, a liquid crystal display screen, a light emitting body such as an LED, a movable body operated by a motor or a solenoid, a speaker device, etc.).

JP 2006-174955 A

  On the other hand, from the viewpoint of environmental protection, awareness of power saving is increasing among players. However, when power is saved by simply reducing the number of electrical components, for example, there is a problem that differentiation due to diversification of production becomes difficult, and the fun of the game due to the production decreases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a suitable game while saving power.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a player from a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. A special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the display, and a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol that suggests a result selected by the lottery means, the display means comprising: A first display unit capable of displaying a dynamic display; and a second display unit that consumes less power than the first display unit. The first display unit forms an image on a screen. A light emitting means for forming an image, and the gaming machine generates display image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means, and supplies power to the display control means at a predetermined timing. Blocking and image formation The display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by turning off the light emitting means and executing the display by the second display means. The power saving means, supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, lighting the image forming light emitting means, and disabling the display by the second display means, thereby stopping the stop symbol. A power saving canceling means for switching the display means used to display the second display means to the first display means, and a dynamic display pattern for storing dynamic display patterns having different dynamic display periods Storage means, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display in accordance with the dynamic display pattern stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means with the first display means, and the dynamic display execution means Pattern selection means for selecting one dynamic display pattern from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means before starting execution of the dynamic display; and the pattern selection The means switches the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, and the dynamic display within a predetermined period. When the dynamic display execution unit starts the first display unit, the dynamic display period is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage unit. Select a long dynamic display pattern.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is the power saving means, and at a predetermined timing, the first display means consumes power from the first display means. Switching to the small second display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means (lottery result) is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented. effective.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, there is an effect that further power saving can be achieved by the amount of power cut off to the display control means.

  Furthermore, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. However, usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means until the display control means operates normally (returns). Therefore, it is difficult to return immediately (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the power saving canceling means switches the display means used to display the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means for a predetermined period. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display period is predetermined from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. A pattern longer than the period is selected. As a result, the dynamic display does not end before the display control means operates normally (returns), and the player can make at least a part of the dynamic display visible. Can be given to players. Therefore, an event in which interest is impaired due to saving power (that is, switching the display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means) Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In addition, in claim 1, “the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means within a predetermined period of time. When the dynamic display is started on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is replaced by the second power saving canceling means. The case where the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means at the timing when the display means is switched to the first display means is also included.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a front frame and a lower pan unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the light emission means provided in a game board. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an effect control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of the operation | movement according to power consumption mode about the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area forward transfer process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode counter update process performed in the presentation mode setting process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp output process performed in the audio | voice lamp effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display process performed in the display effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each display process performed in the display effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by the production | presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening LED lighting control process performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of operation | movement of the main electrical components according to power consumption mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo image corresponding to a light emission means. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the pseudo image corresponding to the production movable body. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp output process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo lamp display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the start LED lighting control process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of operation | movement of the main electrical components according to power consumption mode in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the power-saving symbol display apparatus, (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line of (a). It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the process in which the symbol display apparatus for power saving transfers to a closed state. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power consumption mode setting process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp output process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control process for power saving performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transfer process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode cancellation | release process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control process for power saving of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power saving mode transfer process of 4th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a volume adjustment switch, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship between the output value from a volume adjustment switch, and a volume setting value. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of operation | movement in a normal specification or a power-saving specification about the main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. 60 is a flowchart showing a volume setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect cancellation | release process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp output process of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine 10 of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the work RAM of a display control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of operation | movement of the main electrical components according to power consumption mode in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of an audio lamp control apparatus. 70 is a flowchart showing a power consumption mode setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. 70 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect cancellation | release process performed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a power-saving symbol display control process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. 70 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode release process executed in the main process of FIG. 69. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 69. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the pachinko machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and display control apparatus of 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus of 7th Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the work RAM of the display control apparatus of 7th Embodiment, ( c) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a character ROM of the display control apparatus of the seventh embodiment. (A) is a timing chart which shows the relationship between a fluctuation | variation display and return waiting time when it starts during the period until return waiting time passes, (b) is a normal consumption mode from power saving mode. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change display and the return waiting time when the change display is not executed even when the predetermined return waiting time is ended and the change display is not ended even before the switching. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the button operation processing of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol display control process for power saving of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation aspect extraction process of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of lighting resumption of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process of 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 (not shown for the lower hinge) are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side, with the side on which 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14a that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination.

  On the right side of the upper surface of the wall portion 17a projecting forward that constitutes the upper plate 17, a lending operation portion 40 is disposed. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a ball lending button 42, a return button 43, and a frequency display unit (not shown). When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display section (not shown) is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and a built-in light emitting diode (hereinafter referred to as “LED”) is turned on to indicate the remaining amount as a remaining amount information. Is displayed. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  A mode change button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the wall portion 17a. The mode change button 22 is a button operated by the player, and functions as a button for changing the effect mode of the effect performed on the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with three types of effect modes: a general effect mode, a notice effect mode, and an accessory effect mode. These three types of effect modes can be switched by operating the mode change button 22 during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect. That is, the player can switch to the effect mode according to his / her preference by appropriately operating the mode change button 22 at an appropriate timing.

  Of the three types of effect modes that can be switched by the mode change button 22, the general effect mode is configured as the simplest effect mode. On the other hand, the notice effect mode is a mode in which the notice effect (notification effect) is an effect having a higher impression degree. In the notice effect, the light emitting means for effect such as the first outer peripheral LED 301 (see FIG. 4) is the general effect mode. It is a mode designed to light up or blink more frequently than. Further, the accessory effect mode is a mode in which the impression impression of the effect due to the movement of the effect movable body 361 (see FIG. 7) provided on the game board (see FIG. 2) is increased, and the effect movable body 361 is a general effect. This mode is designed to operate at a higher frequency than the mode. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when compared in the same power consumption mode, the power consumption of the accessory effect mode is the largest. The details will be described later, but the operation of the power saving button 23 described below will be described later. When the large power saving mode is set, the feature effect mode cannot be set even if the mode change button 22 is operated.

  A power saving button 23 is provided on the upper surface of the wall portion 17a. The power saving button 23 is a button operated by the player, and functions as a button for switching the power consumption mode of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with three types of power consumption modes: a normal power consumption mode, a power saving mode, and a large power saving mode, each time the player operates the power saving button 23. These three types of power consumption modes can be sequentially switched. The normal consumption mode is a mode in which each electric component provided in the pachinko machine 10 is normally used without saving power. On the other hand, the power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electrical components is made smaller than the power consumption in the normal consumption mode. Further, the large power saving mode is a mode in which the power consumption by the electric components is further reduced as compared with the power consumption in the small power saving mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the power consumption varies depending on the power consumption mode, and since this power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23, the power consumption can be reduced as necessary ( Power saving). Further, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player who has a high awareness of environmental protection (eco consciousness) can concentrate on the game without feeling guilty about power consumption. Can do. Further, although details will be described later, even in the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the large power saving mode), the specific electric parts are configured to operate or emit light as usual, so that the production is interesting. A suitable game such as being maintained can be provided to the player.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like at various locations around the front frame 14 so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means through the light-transmitting cover. be able to. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, speaker devices (sound output devices) 226 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the front frame 14. From the speaker device 226, a sound effect for enhancing the effect of various effects performed using the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or the above-described light emitting means, and various states such as an error occurrence are notified. A notification sound or the like is output (sounded out).

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower right side of the window portion 14a by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2). The stamp or the like affixed to the reference) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. Note that when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  An effect button 53 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 50. This effect button 53 is used to display an effect indicating the degree of expectation of jackpot and an effect indicating the expected degree of development to reach on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the variation display of the symbol row. Button. The effect button 53 includes a light transmissive cover (not shown) and an effect button LED 323 (see FIG. 4) covered by the cover, and the player produces an effect during the period in which the effect button LED 323 is lit or blinks. By operating the button 53, an effect corresponding to the operation can be displayed.

  The lower plate unit 15 is provided with light emitting means on the left and right sides of the lower plate 50, respectively, so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means through the light-transmitting cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the lower dish unit 15 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, illustrations of nails, metal fittings, and the like are omitted for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14a (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 (an area where a winning opening is provided and a shot ball falls).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed on the left side of the game area as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a 7-segment LED 37a, an LED 37b, and a special figure holding lamp 37c. The 7-segment LED 37a is used for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game and displaying an error.

  On the other hand, the LED 37b is composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) having red, green, and blue emission colors, and displays the first symbol by its lighting color (lighting mode). Specifically, each time the ball wins the first entrance 64, the color change display (variation display) of the LED 37b is performed, and the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37b) when the variation display is stopped. The winning lottery result made by the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 7) triggered by winning at the first entrance 64 is displayed deterministically.

  More specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the LED 37b displays the three-color LEDs in a color change display (variation display) at a high speed in the order of red → green → blue → red →. When elapses, it is fixedly displayed in one of the colors. When the big hit lottery is won, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in red or green (for example, stopped for several seconds).

  In particular, the confirmation display in red indicates that the winning jackpot type is “probable jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in red, the game mode after the special game state (big hit game) is finished, the big hit probability of the big hit lottery is higher than the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second pattern described later is normal. It becomes a high probability mode that is higher than the probability. On the other hand, the confirmation display in green indicates that the winning jackpot type is “ordinary jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in green, the game mode after the special gaming state is ended, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is a normal probability, but the time reduction mode in which the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability It becomes.

  In addition, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases per hit.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery is not won, that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in blue. When the LED 37b is confirmed and displayed in blue, the game mode after the special game state is ended is a normal mode in which the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the hit probability of the second symbol are both normal probabilities.

  In addition, the special figure holding lamp 37c displays the number of times that the ball winning (winning) in the first entrance 64 is held. In the present embodiment, four single color LEDs (for example, red LEDs) are displayed. ). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the ball has won the first entrance 64 and the lottery for the big hit has started, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol stop display (determined). Until the display), the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 (the winning ball) is configured to be held up to 4 times, and the number of holding times is the special figure holding lamp 37c. Is displayed according to the number of lighting LEDs. Hereinafter, the number of holdings for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as a special figure holding ball number N. Note that the special figure holding lamp 37c may be constituted by, for example, two three-color LEDs, and the number of holding times (4 in the present embodiment) may be displayed by a combination of display colors of the respective LEDs.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning (winning) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A symbol display device 81, a second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and a second entrance 67 ( The second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held through the through gate) and the fact that the result of the big win lottery is “probable big hit” before the third symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) ( A notification lamp 85 for providing a notice and notification) is provided.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37, the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) and the display of the first symbol indicating the lottery result (lighting of the LED 37b) are displayed. On the other hand, a decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the first symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is maintained for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to enter the first entrance 64 easily.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the sphere is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of suspension is lit and displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 which is an LED. Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of times the ball is held at the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). It may be set to.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main controller 110 performs a lottery lottery, the first symbol display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37, and the decoration according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 A typical display is shown by the third symbol display device 81.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 63 are the same. Although configured, a different number may be used. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a gaming value (game value) from a normal time (non-special gaming state). A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis (shown in FIG. 7). Part of the solenoid 209). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with a production movable body 361 (see FIG. 7). The effect movable body 361 includes electrical parts such as a solenoid and a motor and resin accessory parts, and operates by supplying electric power to the electrical parts. The effect of production can be enhanced by operating the movable body for production 361 at the time of production. As the production movable body 361, for example, the accessory component is stopped at the normal time, and the accessory component performs a predetermined operation (for example, movement in a predetermined direction, forward / backward movement, rotation, etc.) at the production time. Etc. are exemplified. The electric accessory as the production movable body 361 is not limited to the above-described operation, and is normally housed in the center frame 86 and appears on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 during the production. Also good. In addition, the electric accessory as the production movable body 361 is normally stored in the center frame 86, and at the time of production, a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 that is an LCD that appears from the left and right or the vertical direction is displayed. It may be a shutter member that can be stopped at the covering position.

  Further, in the game area of the game board 13, as in the case of the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 described above, light emitting means composed of LEDs and the like are provided in various places, and light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted. The player can visually recognize the light through the light-transmitting cover. The arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116. Yes.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15. In FIG. 4, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 is shown as a thin line so that the arrangement of the light emitting means is clear.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the front frame 14 has eight first inner peripheral LEDs 301 disposed above the window portion 14a as light emitting means, and ten first inner LEDs disposed on the right side of the window portion 14a. 2 inner peripheral LEDs 302, nine third inner peripheral LEDs 303 disposed below the window portion 14a, twelve fourth inner peripheral LEDs 304 disposed on the left side of the window portion 14a, and an upper left speaker device 226 Four first outer peripheral LEDs 305 disposed on the upper left side of the left side, five second outer peripheral LEDs 306 disposed on the side farther from the window portion 14a than the first inner peripheral LED 301, and on the upper right side of the upper left speaker device 226. Four third outer peripheral LEDs 307 arranged, three fourth outer peripheral LEDs 308 arranged on the side farther from the window portion 14a than the second inner peripheral LED 302, and five arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 14. 5th outer periphery LED309 , A five sixth outer peripheral LED310 disposed on the lower left side of the front frame 14, three of the notification LED311 and is provided to be disposed on the right upper side of the third outer peripheral LED 307. These LEDs 301 to 311 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are effect light emitting means used during the effect. These LEDs 301 to 310 are all constituted by three-color LEDs, and in various effects executed at the time of jackpot or reach, the light emission mode (light emission color, color change mode, lighting or By lighting or flashing in a flashing mode), it plays a role of enhancing the production effect.

  On the other hand, the notification LED 311 is a light emitting means used for notification purposes. This notification LED 321 is configured by a three-color LED, and when a notification event occurs such as when an error occurs or a prize ball is being paid out, the player LED 321 lights or blinks in a light emission mode corresponding to the notification event. It also plays a role in informing the employees in the hall.

  On the other hand, the lower pan unit 15 has seven right lower pan LEDs 321 disposed on the right side of the lower pan 50 and seven left lower pan LEDs 322 disposed on the left side of the lower pan 50 as light emitting means. Three effect buttons LED 323 arranged at the portion of the effect button 53 are provided. These LEDs 321 to 323 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). These LEDs 321 to 323 provided in the lower dish unit 15 are all light emitting means for production, and each is constituted by a three-color LED, and in the case of various productions, similar to the LEDs 301 to 310 described above, A lighting effect is enhanced by lighting or blinking in a light emission mode according to the content of the performance.

  Next, the arrangement of the light emitting means provided in the game area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of light emitting means provided on the game board 13. In FIG. 5, the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is shown as a thin line so that the arrangement of the light emitting means becomes clear.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game area of the game board 13, as the light emitting means, 13 first decorative LEDs 341 arranged around the third symbol display device 81, and a third symbol display from the first decorative LED 341. Ten second decorative LEDs 342 arranged on the right side away from the device 81, three first side LEDs 343 arranged on the upper right side of the gaming area, and three arranged on the right side of the gaming area A cover that covers the second side LED 344, the three third side LEDs 345 disposed at the lower right of the game area, the five notification lamps LED 346 disposed in the portion of the notification lamp 85, and the first entrance 64 Three start opening LEDs 347 arranged inside the member and two specific winning opening LEDs 348 arranged inside the cover member that covers the variable winning device 65 are provided. These LEDs 341 to 348 are all installed so as to be irradiated toward the player (that is, irradiated in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  Among these light emitting means, the decorative LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and the notification LED 346 are all light emitting means for production, and are configured by three-color LEDs. These LEDs 341 to 346, like the above-described LEDs 301 to 310 and LEDs 321 to 323, play a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking in a light emission mode corresponding to the effect contents during various effects. .

  The start port LED 347 is a light emitting means that lights or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode every time a ball wins (enters a ball) at the first entrance 64. The specific winning opening LED 348 is a light emitting means that lights or blinks in a predetermined light emission mode during the big hit game. Each of the start opening LED 347 and the specific winning opening LED 348 is constituted by a three-color LED.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to switch the power consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23 and to save power as necessary. Although details will be described later, when the power consumption mode is a power saving mode (a power saving mode, a power saving mode), a part of the light emitting means illustrated in FIGS. 4 and 5 except for a specific light emitting means. The light emitting means is designed to save power (suppress power consumption) by reducing the luminance or turning it off compared to the normal consumption mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same After the main symbols are aligned and stopped, the jackpot is configured to occur. When shifting to the high probability mode (probability variation mode) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) stops together. On the other hand, when shifting to the normal probability after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (equivalent to “normal symbols”) to which even numbers are added are stopped.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbol is the horizontal direction X, and in the variation in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), each symbol row includes three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. Here, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  Five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 (wins) and a variation display is performed that scrolls in a predetermined variation direction (lateral direction X in this embodiment), the variation display is performed after a predetermined variation time. The upper symbol sequence Z1 → the lower symbol sequence Z3 → the middle symbol sequence Z2 are stopped in this order. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) stops on one of the active lines, a jackpot is generated, and a jackpot video (a jackpot effect is produced during the jackpot game). ) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the changing direction (scrolling direction) is the horizontal direction X, but the changing direction may be the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective line is the upper line (Z1 line in FIG. 6), middle line (Z2 line in FIG. 6), and lower line (Z3 line in FIG. 6). ), The right-up line L4 and the up-left line L5 may be used. In the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  In addition, in the lower left area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, a special figure reservation number display section 87 is displayed. The special figure holding number display section 87 is a part for displaying the number of times that the winning of a ball (winning) in the first entrance 64 is held, that is, the special figure holding ball number N.

  Specifically, the special figure reservation number display unit 87 is configured as four circular display units 87a to 87d arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, and the display unit 87a to 87d are displayed only by the outer frame or are filled with a predetermined color (for example, red) and displayed. More specifically, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is zero (that is, when there is no held ball), the display portions 87a to 87d are all displayed only by the outer frame. On the other hand, when the special figure reservation ball number N is larger than 1 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), the special figure reservation ball number N is represented by the number of filled display portions 87a to 87d. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the three display portions 87 a to 87 c are filled, the display portion 87 d is displayed only with the outer frame, and the special figure holding ball number N is three.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the prize-winning to the 1st entrance slot 64 may be hold | maintained to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum hold frequency (the maximum value of N in special figure reservation ball number N) is 4 times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In that case, the number of display parts constituting the special figure hold number display part 87 may be provided by the maximum number of hold times.

  Further, in the lower right area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the large power saving mode), a power saving mode display 88 indicating “in power saving mode” is displayed. . When the power consumption mode is the power saving mode, the power saving mode display 88 is displayed, so that the player can realize that power saving is in progress.

  The power saving mode display 88 is displayed differently in the power saving mode and the power saving mode, for example, “in the power saving mode” is displayed in the power saving mode, and in the case of the power saving mode. “In power saving mode” may be displayed. Alternatively, “in power saving mode” may be displayed in a different color between the power saving mode and the large power saving mode. In addition, the power saving mode display 88 is not a character “in power saving mode” as shown in FIG. 6, but may be a mode in which three types of power consumption modes can be distinguished by the length and size of the figure, the number of figures, and the like. Any mode may be adopted.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a storage ball storage area, a counter buffer, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. . FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each counter.

  The reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and display of the second symbol display unit 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform a lottery of the results.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value and a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms that is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or at an interval of 2 ms that is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (wins) the first entrance 64. In this reserved ball storage area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) are stored so that the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the ball winning timing can be stored up to four times. ) And one execution area referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 15).

  In each of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) in the holding ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are stored. And an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. In the present embodiment, three areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored are provided in each reserved area in one reserved ball storage area, but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided. These three areas may be divided into a plurality of reserved ball storage areas and stored. For example, a part (one or two areas) of three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the remaining areas are provided. You may comprise so that it may provide in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 can be stored up to four times. In the case of storing the data of the times, the data in order from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winnings that are older in time are stored in the reserved area having a smaller area number. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the reserved first area.

  The execution area in the reserved ball storage area includes an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. An area for storage is provided. In a variation process (see FIG. 13) described later, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area are referred to after being shifted to the execution area. Based on this, the lottery result is determined. Then, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b) or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. The area is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area having the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that are jackpots is the normal probability in the normal mode or the time shortening mode (when the jackpot probability is normal) and the high probability mode (when the jackpot probability is higher than normal). Two types of status) are set. There are two types of random numbers that are jackpots at normal probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523. , 631, 683, 733 ". It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the big hit type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types determined by the first jackpot type counter C2 include jackpots that become a high probability mode after the jackpot end (probable variation jackpots) and jackpots that enter the time reduction mode after the jackpot end (normal jackpots). Yes, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 4, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process in FIG. 16 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , Stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203, more specifically, the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot that becomes a high probability mode after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot) is “1, 2, 3”, and the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends (normal jackpot) The value of the random number that becomes “0” is “0, 4”. A table that stores random values for determining whether the jackpot that becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot ends or the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends, from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 (see FIG. (Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, when it is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 that “the jackpot which becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot is finished”, the jackpot becomes the “probable change jackpot”. On the other hand, when it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1, and when it is determined as “big hit that becomes the short-time mode after the big hit” based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the big hit Becomes a “normal jackpot”.

  Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the value of the first per-type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of big hits (probability big hit or normal big hit), and one type of display corresponding to losing One of the three display modes in total with the mode is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  In the present embodiment, the “probable jackpot” is the jackpot probability of the first symbol after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds until the next jackpot (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The jackpot is a jackpot (16 rounds probable jackpot) that shifts to a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) and also increases the hit probability of the second symbol.

  In addition, after the “normal jackpot” in the present embodiment and the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to the normal state (the jackpot probability is the normal state), and the predetermined number of fluctuations A jackpot (16 round normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased by the interval (in this embodiment, the number of times of 100 fluctuations). In the present embodiment, when the “normal jackpot” is reached, the winning probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations. Instead, the next jackpot lottery is performed. Until the result is determined, the second symbol hit probability may be continuously increased.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “probability jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, but various values (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) ). In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is different for “probability jackpot” and “normal jackpot”. May be. For example, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” may be 16 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpots” may be 7 rounds.

  Further, in this embodiment, when “probable big hit” is set, the winning probability of the second symbol is increased until the next jackpot lottery result is determined. The hit probability of the second symbol may be increased only during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects an effect pattern to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a reach (a symbol other than the final stop symbol among the jackpot symbols is an effective line as a reach symbol). After the occurrence of reach, the final stop is the same as when the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol (for example, a range of 0 to 8). There are three stop patterns (movements): “reach other than front / rear out” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) where the symbol is stopped before and after the reach design, and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur. The display result mode of the target display is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the above.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal). A table having a narrow range of random values 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “front / rear out of reach” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than back and forth out” is 9 to 50, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 may be referred to as a “first variation type counter” and CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting (selecting) a variation display (dynamic display) pattern (variation pattern) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns of normal variation, normal reach variation, and super reach variation are set as variation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured to have different production times (variation times).

  Among these fluctuation patterns, the “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which the display result of the loss appears without the reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 11 seconds.

  “Normal reach variation” is a so-called normal reach variation pattern with reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

  “Super reach fluctuation” is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol. In the present embodiment, the “super reach variation” is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol in “super reach fluctuation”, a specific character appears, a specific background display, For example, the symbols may be changed in a specific manner (for example, the symbols may be enlarged or reduced, or the symbols may fluctuate and fluctuate).

  When selecting a variation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first variation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referenced. This first selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or, each reach) is different in each first selection table, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the variation pattern differs for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in this embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second variation type counter CS2 is a variation pattern from when a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs, to when the final stop symbol stops. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol stops after occurrence of reach may be simply referred to as “fluctuation symbol number”. That is, in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence after the symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol column Z1 and the symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol column Z3 are stopped in the normal reach according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The number of change symbols until the Z2 symbol (medium symbol) stops is determined.

  A second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is used to determine the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. Is selected and referenced. The second selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or the range of the second variation type counter CS2 is different in each variation pattern selection table with respect to the number of variation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of changing symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs differs.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the last stop symbol is stopped after the reach occurs. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, a rough variation pattern such as the type of reach such as normal reach is determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and more detailed symbols such as normal reach A, normal reach B, etc. are determined by the second variation type counter CS2. A variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a wide variety of variation display can be easily realized.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a “third variation type counter”.

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the notice effect. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the fluctuating symbol (so-called “slip effect”) or returns the symbol (so-called “return effect”) in addition to the variation of the third symbol. Since a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect can be performed, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the time required for the notice effect to add to the variable time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) An effect pattern in which the variation time is subtracted (for example, −1 second) or an effect pattern in which the variation time is not added or subtracted is selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the effect time addition / subtraction value is determined. By adding or subtracting the effect time addition / subtraction value determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 to the variation time determined based on the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the first symbol or the third symbol The variation time of the variation display (that is, the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the variation display can be further diversified by combining the variation type counter CS3.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value of the variation type counter CS3 (random value). A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding ball number N, Depending on the table, etc., tables with different selection ratios of the production patterns are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). For example, in this embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Returning again to FIG. In addition to the counters and flags described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 12), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a first entrance switch 208a. And various switches 208 including a switch group or a sensor group (not shown), and a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like. It is connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. Note that the NMI interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 111 is the same processing as the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) executed by the main control device 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and a stop switch for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The production control device 117 is configured to output sound in the speaker device 226 as an audio output device, turn on / off the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, set an operation pattern of the production movable body 361, It controls the display of the variation of the third symbol, the jackpot effect, the display of the special figure reservation ball number N, and the like on the three symbol display device (LCD) 81.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body driving device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 includes a main control device 110, an image controller 274, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, a movable body driving device 297, a mode change button 22, a power saving button 23, and an effect button. 53 and the speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, bus lines 279 and 280, and first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296. And a movable body driving device 297.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 includes a main control device 110, an image controller 274, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, a movable body driving device 297, a mode change button 22, a power saving button 23, and an effect button. 53 and the speaker device 226 are connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the structure of RAM273 of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 273 includes a power saving counter 273a, an effect mode counter 273b, a large power saving mode flag 273c, a changing flag 273d, a customer waiting effect flag 273e, a mode changeable flag 273f, Medium mode change flag 273g.

  The power saving counter 273a is a counter for setting a mode selected or instructed by the power saving button 23 among three kinds of power consumption modes (normal power consumption mode, small power saving mode, and large power saving mode). The power saving counter 273a is incremented by 1 every time the player operates the power saving button 23, reaches a value defined as the maximum value ("2" in the present embodiment), and then returns to zero. The power saving counter 273a is initialized and set to zero (cleared to zero) when the power is turned on.

  The effect mode counter 273b is a counter for setting the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among the three kinds of effect modes (the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect mode). The effect mode counter 273b is initialized when the power is turned on and is set to zero (zero clear).

  The effect mode counter 273b is incremented by one each time the mode change button 22 is operated at an effective or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the conditions for the effect mode counter 273b to return to zero differ depending on the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 0 or 1 (that is, in the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode), the effect mode counter 273b is set to the value set as the maximum value (this embodiment). Then, after reaching “2”), it is reset to zero. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (that is, in the case of the large power saving mode), the effect mode counter 273b is forced to zero with the operation of the mode change button 22 after reaching 1. Returned to That is, when the power consumption mode is the large power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b cannot take 2 and cannot be set to the accessory effect mode.

  The power saving mode flag 273c is a flag indicating whether or not the set power consumption mode is the power saving mode. When the power saving mode flag 273c is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the power saving mode is set, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”). This indicates that the large power saving mode is not set, that is, the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode is set. The power saving mode flag 273c is set to ON when the value of the power saving counter 273a is set to “2” after being set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the value of the power saving counter 273a is set to a value other than “2”. If set to a value, it is set to off.

  The changing flag 273d is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, changing). When the changing flag 273d is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is changing, and when it is set to OFF (that is, “0”), the change is stopped. Indicates that there is. The changing flag 273d is turned off as an initial value when the power is turned on, then turned on with the start of changing display, and turned off with the end of changing display.

  The customer waiting effect flag 273e is a flag indicating whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is in the customer waiting effect. The “customer waiting effect” is a display unrelated to the gaming state displayed on the 3rd symbol gaming device 81 when the 3rd symbol display device 81 does not display the variable display or the video display during the big hit game. Production (for example, title display or demonstration display). When the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed. When the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to off (that is, “0”), This indicates that the waiting effect is not performed (that is, changing or jackpot). The customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on. Then, after the effect control device 117 receives the customer wait effect command from the main control device 110, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the customer wait effect image (customer wait effect). When switched, it is set to ON, and is set to OFF along with the start of variable display (that is, the end of the customer waiting effect).

  The mode change enable flag 273f is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 during the change (during the change display) (in the present embodiment, during high-speed change). When the mode change enable flag 273f is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is time to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22 during change (that is, during high speed change). When it is off (that is, “0”), it indicates that it is a time when the mode change button 22 cannot change the effect mode during the change. The mode change enable flag 273f is set to OFF during the high speed fluctuation after being set to OFF as the initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to OFF when the high speed fluctuation is not performed.

  The changing mode change flag 273g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high-speed changing. When the changing mode change flag 273g is set to ON (that is, “1”), it is confirmed that the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during the high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 273g is set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high-speed change after being set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on. Is turned off when is finished.

  Returning again to FIG. The RAM 273 stores the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like in addition to the above.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 based on the internal command received from the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117, and intervenes in reading and writing data. Data stored in the RAM 276 is read at a predetermined timing, a frame-by-frame variation display image is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for effects such as symbols (third symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores various data for effects used for, for example, variable display (variable effects) and jackpot effects. The variable display data (variable display data) stored in the character ROM 275 is composed of the character design data of the third design, the data for the background image, the data for the notice character design, and the like. The fluctuation display data stored in the character ROM 275 is prepared for each effect mode (that is, the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect mode), and the change pattern command received from the main control means and Variation display data corresponding to the value of the effect mode counter 273b is read by the image controller 274.

  The character ROM 275 stores the data for presentation as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary data for presentation (production data) compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). This variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (variable effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 274 in accordance with time to generate a variable display image in units of frames.

  The reason why various data are read out from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable display data storage area is that the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  Each of the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 controls the lighting of the LED as the light emitting means by PWD (Pulse Width Modulation). The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are connected to the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start port LED 347, and the specific winning port LED 347, respectively. The first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 include the LEDs 301 to 310, the LEDs 321 to 323, the LEDs 341 to 346, the notification LED 311, the start port LED 347, and the specific winning port LED 347, depending on the gaming state. Control is performed based on the lighting pattern set and output by the MPU 271.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits power (lights up or blinks) the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, or power consumption required to operate the effect movable body 361 in three stages. The power consumption mode can be changed. Here, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (small power saving mode, large power saving mode), among these light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348), mainly the effect of rendering. For the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 that play a role of increasing the brightness, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the brightness to a brightness lower than the brightness in the normal consumption mode or turning it off.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346. The duty ratio (ratio of on-time to the sum of on-time and off-time) is made smaller than the duty ratio of current in the normal consumption mode, so that these LEDs 301-310, 321-323, 341-346 Decrease (decrease) brightness. Hereinafter, the luminance in the normal mode is referred to as “normal luminance”, and the luminance in the power saving mode is referred to as “medium luminance”. In addition, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the duty ratio of the current supplied from the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 to the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346. These LEDs 301-310, 321-323, 341-346 are extinguished by setting zero to zero (that is, not turned on or remains off).

  The movable body drive device 297 is connected to the electrical parts (solenoid, motor, etc.) of the production movable body 361, and is driven and controlled by the PWD based on the operation pattern set and output by the MPU 271 according to the gaming state. Thus, the effect movable body 361 is operated.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the power consumption required for the electric parts (solenoid, motor, etc.) for operating the production movable body 361 according to the set power consumption mode. ing.

  Specifically, for the production movable body 361 operated by the motor, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode), the duty ratio of the current supplied to the motor is normally consumed. By making the duty ratio smaller or zero compared to the duty ratio in the mode, the operation amount of the production movable body 361 can be made smaller or zero compared to the normal consumption mode (that is, the operation is stopped). As a result, power consumption can be saved.

  On the other hand, for the effect movable body 361 operated by the solenoid, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the power saving mode), the number of times the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 excites the solenoid. By setting a smaller operation pattern than the number of times of excitation in the normal consumption mode, the operation amount of the production movable body 361 can be reduced or zero compared to the normal consumption mode (that is, the operation This can save power consumption.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the sound output from the speaker device 226, the control of turning on and off the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348, and the third in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are performed. Although the control such as the change display of the symbols is collectively performed by the effect control device 117, various controls may be shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of voice output and control of lighting and extinguishing of LEDs and various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 displays the variation of the third symbol. You may comprise so that control may be performed with a dedicated control apparatus (display control apparatus).

  In the present embodiment, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are provided in the effect control device 117, but may be provided separately from the effect control device 117. In such a case, the effect control device 117 sets the brightness according to the lighting pattern of the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, and 341 to 348 and the power consumption mode, and the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 set the brightness. You may comprise so that lighting of LED301-311,321-323,341-348 may be controlled based on setting. Similarly, the movable body drive device 297 is configured to be provided in the effect control device 117, and the effect control device 117 sets the operation amount according to the operation pattern and the power consumption mode of the effect movable body 361. The drive device 297 may control the effect movable body 361 based on the setting.

  Further, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 are set as one LED control device, and the LEDs 301 to 311 and 321 to 323 are based on the lighting pattern and the brightness output from the effect control device 117 by this one LED control device. , 341 to 348 may be controlled to be turned on and off.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which gives the function of the 1st-6th LED control apparatuses 291-296 and the movable body drive device 297 to MPU271. In such a case, the first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296 and the movable body driving device 297 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 7 are omitted, and the LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323, 341 to 348, and the production movable body. 361 is connected to the input / output port 277, respectively.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110, 112, 117, 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated. These 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used as the control devices 110, 112, 117, 291 to 297, and the speaker device 226. Supply the necessary voltage to

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player. When the player operates the power saving button 23, the power consumption mode (that is, the pachinko machine 10 (Power consumption) can be changed. Here, with reference to FIG. 10, it will be described how operations of main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 are changed according to the power consumption mode.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of operations according to the power consumption mode for main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 10, as main electrical components, inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, and notification LEDs 311 provided on the front frame 14, lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, and effect button LEDs 323 provided on the lower pan unit 15 , A first symbol display device 37 that is an LED, a second symbol display device 83 that is an LED, a third symbol display device 81 that is an LCD, decorative LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and an announcement LED 346. The start opening LED 347, the specific winning opening LED 348, and the production movable body 361 are listed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, all the listed electrical components emit light with normal luminance and operate in normal operation. That is, in the normal consumption mode, the electrical component operates with the normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, among the listed electrical components, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, the effect button LED 323, For the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, the notification LED 346, and the start-up LED 347, the luminance is reduced from normal luminance to medium luminance. On the other hand, the other LEDs or LCDs remain at normal brightness. Further, the operation amount of the effect movable body 361 is reduced from the normal operation to the weak operation. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the luminance and operation amount of some electrical components are reduced to medium luminance and weak operation, so that power consumption can be saved compared to the normal consumption mode.

  Further, when the power consumption is set to the large power saving mode, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 whose luminance is set to the medium luminance in the above-described small power saving mode are turned off. The other LEDs or LCDs are kept at normal brightness as in the power saving mode. In addition, the effect movable body 361 is stopped. Therefore, in the large power saving mode, part of the electrical components are turned off or stopped, so that it is possible to save more power than in the small power saving mode.

  As described above, even when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (low power mode, large power saving mode), the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, remains at the normal luminance. Since the 3rd symbol display device 81 is a device which can make a player recognize the various effects (for example, a notice effect, a reach effect, etc.) performed in order to raise the interest of a game most effectively, this is taken. By maintaining the brightness of the third symbol display device 81 at the normal brightness, even if the brightness of some of the LEDs is reduced (or turned off), the fun of the performance performed by the pachinko machine 10 is maintained. Can do.

  In addition, the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always kept at the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode. Since the specific prize opening LED 348 is disposed in the variable prize winning device 65 which is the most important member that gives the player a profit in the big hit game, the luminance of the specific prize opening LED 348 is kept at the normal luminance. Thus, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game is a jackpot game that provides an advantageous state for the player by opening the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the joy and enjoyment felt by the player from being reduced.

  The 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81 display the result of the jackpot lottery performed in response to the winning of the ball at the first entrance 64, and the 2nd symbol display device 83. Displays the result of the winning lottery performed in response to the winning of a ball at the second entrance 67. That is, each of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is a device that displays the lottery result related to the player's profit so that the player can visually recognize it. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the luminance of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81 is always kept at the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode. Therefore, the player can surely see the result related to his / her profit, and the player can be prevented from feeling distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the notification LED 311 is also always kept at the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode. Therefore, various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the error can be quickly resolved so that the player can quickly return to the game. Can be discovered at an early stage.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only can the power consumption mode be changed by the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player, but also the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the power saving mode). However, since the specific electric component is configured to operate or emit light as usual, it is possible to provide the player with a suitable game such as maintaining the fun of the production. Further, since the player can change the power consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23, it is possible to concentrate on the game without causing a player with high environmental protection (eco-consciousness) to feel guilty about power consumption. it can. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a suitable game while saving power.

  In particular, in the power saving mode, the luminance of some of the light emitting means (that is, LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) is lower than that of the normal consumption mode (that is, medium). The number of light emitting means for emitting light and the number of acting movable bodies for operation are usually consumed. It is possible to provide the player with an interesting performance that is almost the same as the mode.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically started (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, and are roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing.

  First, referring to FIG. 11, a startup process when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer and waits for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the effect control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. Therefore, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S112, S113), the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. In addition, by this external output process (S201), a variation pattern command, a type command, a stop command, an effect time addition / subtraction command, and the like necessary for the third symbol display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the effect control device 117. When a ball is fired, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112. If some error occurs in main controller 110 and an error command for the error is set, the error command is transmitted to effect control device 117 in the external output process (S201).

  After the process of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific prize opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and then a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (this implementation) is given to the special prize opening 65a. In the embodiment, when 10 balls are entered, the process of closing the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed by a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment).

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding areas in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and effect control device 117). Transmit (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of a special figure reservation ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls is acquired (S303). After the process of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304).

  At this time, if the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is stored. A reservation ball storage area forward process for sequentially shifting to the execution area side is executed (S305). Detailed processing executed in the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305), the first symbol display device 37 executes variation start processing for starting the variation display of the first symbol (S306), and ends the variation processing (S204). The detailed processing executed in the variation start processing (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), a special figure control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). A special figure control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of change to the end of change. The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the change type counter CS3. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37b of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Here, the stop symbol displayed by the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 as to whether or not it is a big hit. Furthermore, with regard to the jackpot stop symbol, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop symbol when the jackpot is set to the high probability mode after the jackpot (that is, the probability variation jackpot) and the time reduction mode after the jackpot is set (ie , Usually a big jackpot) stop symbol. For example, if it is a probable big hit, red LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol, and if it is a normal big hit, green LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol. On the other hand, if the lottery result (the value of the first random number counter C1) is out of place, the LED 37b is lit in blue as a stop symbol. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display is set to end (stop) the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37. (S309) After setting the stop command to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the lighting of the LED in the 1st symbol display device 37 (S310), the fluctuation processing (S204) is finished, the main processing Return to FIG. When receiving the stop command set in S310, the effect control device 117 ends the 1 variable display being executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  If the result of the determination in S304 is that the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (S311). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S311: Yes), the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S311 is that the customer waiting effect is not in progress (S311: No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect standby flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on ( S312). At this time, if the customer waiting effect waiting flag is off (S312: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned on (S313), and the counting of the customer waiting effect waiting time is started using a counter (not shown) (S314). Then, the variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9). In addition, when the time measurement by a counter (not shown) is started by the process of S314, this counter is updated every time a timer interrupt process (not shown) is periodically executed. The counter may be updated in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) described later.

  Further, as a result of the determination in S312, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start of time measurement in S314 (S315). If the predetermined time has not elapsed (S315: No) ) Since it is during the period of waiting for the execution of the customer waiting effect, the variation process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed as a result of the determination in S315 (S315: Yes), since it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, a customer waiting effect command is set (S316), and the customer waiting effect is set. After turning off the standby flag (S317), the variation process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 12). The customer waiting effect command set by the process of S316 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When receiving the customer waiting effect command, the effect control device 117 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the customer waiting effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the above-described reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13).

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data (first random number counter value, first hit type counter value, and stop pattern stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area) The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to an area having a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved area where data is stored (held) among the second to fourth reserved areas. Therefore, since a data shift process is not performed for a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and a control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a 2nd-4th reserved area may be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter (number N of special figure reservation balls) (S353), and a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure reservation ball counter after the subtraction is set (S354). The hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output hold number command is received by the production control device 117, the same number as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special figure hold number display part 87. Is displayed in a solid color (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), a new holding number is displayed by the number of lit LEDs constituting the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37. (S355), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13).

  Next, the above-described change start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 13).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time.

  In the present embodiment, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “310” or “608” at the normal probability (in the normal mode or the time reduction mode), it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401. Is done. On the other hand, at the time of high probability (high probability mode), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ”, it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401.

  When it is determined that the game is a big hit by the process of S401 (S401: Yes), the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37b) displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S402). Specifically, in S402, after determining the jackpot type (that is, the stop pattern at the time of jackpot) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the determined jackpot type Is set so that a display mode corresponding to the above is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3”, the big hit type is “probable big hit”, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 4”. ", The jackpot type is" normal jackpot ".

  After the process of S402, based on the value of the big hit type and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined ( S403).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time is determined from the normal reach variation (20 seconds) and the super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 Based on this value, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the last stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  Note that the above-described variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether to set the value or both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), a display mode (lighted state of the LED 37b) at the time of disconnection displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408). Specifically, in S408, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a stop pattern at the time of detachment (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, or complete disengagement) is determined. After that, setting is performed so that a display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the process of S408, based on the stop pattern at the time of detachment indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment Is determined (S409).

  That is, in the same manner as the processing of S403 described above, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the rough variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds) is roughly selected. In addition to determining the variation time of the symbol variation, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (medium symbol)) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. decide. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S409, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S408, when “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S409. As shown, the table is preset.

  After the process of S403 or S409, the effect time (addition / subtraction value of effect time) to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by these processes is determined (S404). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S404, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S403 or S409 is set (S405), and then the display mode set by the processing of S402 or S408 (ie, stop) Set the type command according to the symbol. (S408). Thereafter, an effect time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the effect time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S404 is set (S407), the fluctuation start process (S306) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13).

  As described above, after the “holding number command” is set in the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 14), the “variation pattern command” and “type” are set in the change start process (see FIG. 15). Commands are set in the order of “command” and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 12), since the commands are output in the order in which the commands are set, when the variable display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 619, 15, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor (not shown), and confirms that a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the launch of the sphere as a condition. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process (S504) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), a start winning command is set (S602). The start winning command set by the process of S602 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  After the processing of S602, it is determined whether or not the number N of special figure reservation balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). At this time, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of special figure holding balls N <4 (S603: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type updated in step S503 The values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604).

  Next, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N (S605), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after the addition is issued. Setting is made (S606). The hold number command set by the process of S606 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). When the output hold number command is received by the production control device 117, the same number as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command among the display units 87a to 87d constituting the special figure hold number display part 87. Is displayed in a solid color (see FIG. 6).

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), a new holding number is displayed by the number of lit LEDs constituting the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37. (S607), the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  On the other hand, if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the number of special figure reservation balls N <4 is not satisfied (S603: No) ), Skips the processes of S604 to S606, ends the start winning process (S504), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 by executing the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. As processing of the MPU 271, startup processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the startup processing, and commands executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. Roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002). This power-on notification process (S1002) is a notification for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the speaker device 226 or the front frame. 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, and the like, and various screens (for example, the first inner peripheral LED 301), the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process (S1002) is executed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video is displayed. The data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 indicates whether the current start-up process was executed because the MPU 271 was reset during the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) described later. It is determined whether or not a disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, but when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110, it stores the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. Then, the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed. The power-off process in progress flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. It should be noted that data in the RAM 273 is lost during the execution of the power-off process or when the power supply is completely shut down after the completion of the execution. In this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As a second state, a power interruption process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) was performed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power supply was not interrupted and returned to normal, and then the power interruption process was completed. This is a state where the MPU 271 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power-off occurred. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is determined whether the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). As a check method performed in S1007, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Determine. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1014), and the power is shut off. Loop endlessly. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 is normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and the RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1111 in FIG. 20) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011). Next, the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1012), the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of executing the start-up process means, for example, that the data in the RAM 273 including the data of the power-off flag is lost, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like. Is reset and the power-off flag is not turned on (that is, no power-off command is received from the main controller 110).

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is turned off (S1010: No), the process of S1011 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1012. Is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Note that when the power-off flag is turned off, the clearing process of S1011 is skipped because only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by storing the work area data. In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 described above, and thereafter repeatedly. It is a process to be executed.

  In the main process, first, a power consumption mode setting process for setting a power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). Details of the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), the effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). Details of the effect mode setting process (S1102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S1102), it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the process of S1103 was executed last time) (S1103). If 1 ms or more has elapsed since the determination of (1) (S1103: Yes), an audio lamp effect process, which is a process for executing various lamp lighting control, audio output control, and the like, is executed (S1104), and S1105 is executed. Move on to processing. The details of the sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if 1 ms has not yet elapsed from the previous determination as a result of the determination in S1103 (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. Note that when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1101, the audio lamp effect process (S1104) is skipped in the audio lamp effect process (S1104). This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control with a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the process of S1105 was executed last time) (S1105). At this time, when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect and a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect are displayed in the third symbol display. A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1106). Details of this display effect process (S1106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the display effect process (S1106), an effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. In this effect movable body control process (S1107), an operation pattern of the effect movable body 631 corresponding to each effect is set so as to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable object driving device. By outputting to 297, the effect movable body 631 is operated in the set operation pattern.

  In the case where the electrical component that operates the effect movable body 631 is a solenoid, for example, an operation pattern in which the number of excitations of the solenoid varies depending on the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). By setting, a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained. In other words, the power consumption of the solenoid is increased by setting the normal excitation mode (the number of excitations corresponding to normal operation)> the power saving mode (the number of excitations corresponding to weak operation)> the large power saving mode (the number of excitations = 0). A power saving effect according to the mode can be obtained.

  Further, when the electrical component that operates the effect movable body 631 is a motor, for example, by setting an operation pattern in which the driving period (voltage application time) of the motor is different according to the value of the power saving counter 273a, A power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained. In other words, the motor drive period is changed to the normal power consumption mode (driving period corresponding to normal operation)> the power saving mode (driving period corresponding to the weak operation)> the large power saving mode (operation stop). A corresponding power saving effect can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the case where the electric component that operates the movable body for production 631 is a motor, the movable body is driven according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode) in addition to the setting of the operation pattern. By setting information defining the operation amount of the device 297 and outputting the information to the movable body drive device 297, a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode can be obtained. For example, by setting a value that defines the duty ratio of the driving voltage of the motor according to the value of the power saving counter 273a and outputting it to the movable body driving device 297, it is possible to obtain a power saving effect according to the power consumption mode.

  Specifically, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “0”, information that defines the duty ratio of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effecting movable body 631 is the normal operation is output to the movable body driving device 297. To do. Thereby, the movable body drive device 297 can be operated in a normal operation in the normal consumption mode. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “1”, the information that specifies the duty ratio (value smaller than the normal operation) of the drive voltage at which the operation amount of the effecting movable body 631 becomes a weak operation is driven by the movable body. Output to the device 297. Thereby, in the power saving mode, the movable body driving device 297 can be operated with a weak operation. Further, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is “2”, the information specifying that the duty ratio of the driving voltage is zero is output to the movable body driving device 297. Thereby, the movable body drive device 297 remains stopped in the large power saving mode.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1105, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: No), the process of S1106 and S1107 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1108. Note that the display effect process (S1106) is skipped when the display effect process (S1106) has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1105. This is the third effect display device (LCD) 81. This is because it is not necessary to execute such a process with a cycle shorter than 20 ms because the image to be displayed is updated according to the variation time. Similarly, the effect movable body control process (S1107) need not be executed in a cycle shorter than 20 ms.

  In the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1108). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined by the processing in S1108 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1108: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1110), and the power interruption processing is performed. Execute (S1111). After the power-off process (S1111) is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1112), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  In the power-off process of S1111, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348), and third The output of the symbol display device 81 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1108, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored (S1108: No), the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 19) is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1109). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1109: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1109 are repeated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1109 (S1109: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is in an infinite loop, the display effect process (S1106) is not executed, and thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner peripheral LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13, and the like The RAM destruction may be notified on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), first, it is confirmed whether or not the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). If the power saving button 23 has not been operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, when the power saving button 23 is operated as a result of checking in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the power saving counter 273a (S1202), and whether or not the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2 is determined. It is determined (S1203).

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a exceeds 2 as a result of the determination in S1203 (S1203: Yes), the power saving counter 273a is cleared to zero, the value is set to zero (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. On the other hand, when the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 or less (S1203: No), the process of S1204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1205. Through the processing in S1023 and S1204, the power saving counter 273a is sequentially changed within a range of 0 to 2 every time the power saving button 23 is operated.

  In S1205, it is determined whether or not the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1205). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 as a result of the determination by the processing of S1205, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S1205: Yes), the power saving mode flag 273c is turned on ( In step S1206, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 2 as a result of the determination in S1205, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1205: No), the large power saving mode is set. The flag 273c is turned off (S1207), the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Next, the effect mode setting process (S1102) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process (S1102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the effect mode setting process (S1102), first, it is confirmed whether the mode change button 22 has been operated (S1221). If the mode change button 22 has not been operated (S1221: No), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1221 (S1221: Yes), it is determined whether the changing flag 273d is on (S1222). At this time, if the changing flag 273d is on (S1222: Yes), it is determined whether the mode change enable flag 273f is on (S1223).

  If the mode change enable flag 273f is off (S1223: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S1223, the time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 even in the changing state (in this embodiment, In such a case, the production mode setting process (S1102) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the mode change enable flag 273f is turned on as a result of the determination in S1223 (S1223: Yes), the time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 during the change (in this embodiment, the high-speed change). In this case, the changing mode change flag 273g is turned on (S1224).

  After the process of S1224, the effect mode counter update process is executed (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). The effect mode counter update process (S1225) is a process of updating the value of the effect mode counter 273a, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the changing flag 273d is OFF as a result of the determination in S1222 (S1222: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting effect flag 273e is ON (S1226). At this time, if the customer waiting effect flag 273e is off (S1226: No), it is the time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited. In such a case, the effect mode setting process (S1102) is terminated, Returning to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1226, if the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on (S1226: Yes), the effect mode can be changed (permitted). After performing the effect mode counter update process (S1225), the effect mode setting process (S1102) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  Thus, according to the effect mode setting process (S1102), the mode change button 22 is operated at the timing when the mode change enable flag 273f is on (that is, during high-speed fluctuation) or the customer waiting effect flag 273e. If is ON (that is, during the customer waiting effect), the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is executed. As a result, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is updated, and the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed (switched).

  Next, the above-described effect mode counter update process (S1225) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect mode counter update process (S1225) executed in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) described above.

  In the effect mode counter update process (S1225), first, 1 is added to the value of the effect mode counter 273b (S1231), and it is determined whether the large power saving mode flag 273c is on (S1232).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1232, if the power saving mode flag 273c is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S1232: Yes), the value of the effect mode counter 273b is set to 1. It is determined whether it exceeds (S1233). If the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 1 as a result of the determination in S1233 (S1233: Yes), the effect mode counter 273b is cleared to zero and the value is set to zero (S1234). (S1225) is ended, and the process returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 1 or less as a result of the determination by the process of S1233 (S1233: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is ended. Then, the process returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power saving mode is set to the power saving mode (that is, when the power saving mode flag 273c is turned on), the effect mode counter 273b displays the mode change button 22 by the processing of S1233 and S1234. Each time it is manipulated, it can alternately take on a value of 0 or 1. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the large power saving mode, the general effect mode or the notice effect mode can be set, but the accessory effect mode with the largest power consumption cannot be set.

  Further, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1232, if the large power saving mode flag 273c is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the small power saving mode (S1232: No), the effect mode counter It is determined whether the value of 273b exceeds 2 (S1235). If the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 2 as a result of the determination in S1235 (S1235: Yes), the effect mode counter 273b is cleared to zero, and the value is set to zero (S1234). (S1225) is ended, and the process returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if the value of the effect mode counter 273b is 2 or less as a result of the determination by the process of S1235 (S1235: No), the process of S1234 is skipped and the effect mode counter update process (S1225) is ended. Then, the process returns to the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22). Therefore, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, the effect mode counter 273b is in the range of 0 to 2 every time the mode change button 22 is operated by the processing of S1235 and S1234. Are changed sequentially. That is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode, one of three types of effect modes (general effect mode, notice effect mode, and accessory effect mode) can be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the above-described sound lamp effect process (S1104) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1104), a lamp output process (S1241) is first executed. In this lamp output process (S1241), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13 and the like so as to become a lighting pattern edited in the process of S1243 described later. 323, 341 to 346), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1242). In this effect button input monitoring / effect process (S1242), the input of whether or not the effect button 53 is operated by the player to enhance the effect of the effect is monitored, and the input of the effect button 53 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform the effect. For example, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the effect button 53, or the expectation to the jackpot is displayed by pressing the effect button 53 during the reach effect. Change to a production you can have. Note that the operation timing of the effect button 53 is also suggested to the player by the lighting or blinking of the effect button LED 323.

  After the effect button input monitoring / effect process (S1242) is executed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1243). In the lamp editing process (S 1243), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13, and the like so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  After the execution of the lamp editing process (S1243), the sound editing / output process is executed (S1244). In the sound editing / output process (S1244), the output pattern of the speaker device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1244, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1245), the sound lamp effect process (S1104) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245), based on the variation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S1245), the lamp editing process in S1243 and the sound editing / output process in S1244 are executed.

  Next, the lamp output process (S1241) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the lamp output process (S1241) executed in the above-described audio lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S1251). If the jackpot is being hit (S1251: Yes), the sixth LED control device 296 is set to emit light with normal luminance. (S1252), the process proceeds to S1253. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1253.

  In S1253, it is determined whether or not the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1253). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination by the processing of S1253 (S1253: Yes), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are set to emit light with normal luminance (S1254). The lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed last time is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and the lamp output processing (S1241) is ended. Returning to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero (S1253: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1253, it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1256: Yes), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 is set to emit light with medium luminance (S1257). The lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 (S1255), the lamp output process (S1241) is terminated, and the sound lamp effect process (FIG. 24) is performed. Return to Reference).

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination in S1256, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1256: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are used. On the other hand, the light is turned off (S1258), the lamp output process (S1241) is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 24).

  In the lamp output process (S1241) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1255 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296, and the LED control devices 291 to 293 that have received the setting. , 296 illuminate or blink the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346, and 348 in a lighting pattern according to the received setting.

  The luminance set in S1255, S1257, and S1258 is output to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, and the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 have the luminance set in S1255, S1257, and S1258. Then, the corresponding LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are turned on or blinked.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are lit with different luminances according to the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Flashes or turns off. Specifically, the brightness of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and is set to the medium brightness when the power saving mode is set. It is said. Further, when the power saving mode is set, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 are turned off (that is, the luminance is set to zero).

  In addition, the luminance set in S1252 is output to the sixth LED control device 296, and the sixth LED control device 296 lights or blinks the specific prize opening LED 348 with the luminance set in S1252. Therefore, the brightness of the specific winning opening LED 348 is always set to the normal brightness regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a.

  Next, the display effect process (S1106) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether it is a jackpot) (S1261). If it is medium (S1261: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1273). In this jackpot effect process, effect data corresponding to the jackpot effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276 to update the image of the jackpot effect. After the end of the jackpot effect process (S1273), the display effect process (S1106) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the processing of S1261 (S1261: No), it is determined whether or not the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executing the variation display of the 3rd symbol (that is, whether or not it is changing). (S1262). At this time, if not changing (S1262: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1263).

  The variation start flag (not shown) is a flag for instructing the start of variation display of the third symbol, and when it is determined in S1263 that the variation start flag is on, the variation display of the third symbol is started. . This variation start flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see FIG. 29), and is set to OFF when the third symbol variation display is started.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1263, if the change start flag is on (S1263: Yes), the change start flag is turned off (S1264), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S1265), and the changing flag 273d is set. It is turned on (S1266).

  After the process of S1266, an initial value is set in a variable time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S1267). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the variation time counter in S1267 is the time obtained from the variation time of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time indicated by the effect time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1267, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S1268). On the other hand, if the result of determination in step S1262 is that the third symbol variation display is being executed (in variation) (S1262: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation time counter (S1274), and the processing in step S1268 is performed. It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S1268 is within the variation time (S1268: Yes), variation display processing is executed (S1269). The variation display process (S1269) is a process of executing variation display (that is, variation effect) of the symbol (third symbol), and detailed processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1269, the display effect process (S1106) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1268, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S1268: No), it is set based on the type command received from the main controller 110. The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1270). After the process of S1270, the changing flag 273d is turned off (S1271), the changing mode change flag 273g is turned off (S1272), the display effect process (S1106) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1263 is that the variation start flag is off (S1263: No), each display process is executed (S1275), the display effect process (S1106) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. In each display process (S1275), a display process such as a customer waiting effect that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player is executed. Detailed processing of each display processing (S1275) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described variation display process (S1269) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable display process (S1269) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26).

  In the change display process (S1269), first, it is determined whether or not the changing mode change flag 273g is on (S1301). If the changing mode change flag 273g is off as a result of the determination in S1301 (S1301: No), the effect mode is not changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high-speed change. Based on the value of the effect mode counter 273b and the change pattern command received from the main controller 110, the change display image of the present effect mode (ie, the effect mode indicated by the value of the effect mode counter 273b) is displayed as the change time counter ( (S1305) and the process proceeds to S1303.

  That is, in S1305, the variation display image selected by the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b and the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the variation display image at the timing indicated by the value of the variation time counter. Set up. As a result, the image controller 274 reads the necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms the variation display image (variation display image in units of frames) set by the processing of S1305, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81. Let

  On the other hand, if the changing mode change flag 273g is on (S1301: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S1301, the effect mode is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during the high speed change. Based on the value of the counter 273b and the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the value of the variation time counter in the previous effect mode (that is, the effect mode indicated by the value of the effect mode counter 273b before being updated) is obtained. The background image in the corresponding variation display image is changed to the background image corresponding to the current rendering mode (that is, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the rendering mode counter 273b at this time) (S1302), and the processing is performed. Goes to S1303. The image controller 274 reads necessary fluctuation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a fluctuation display image (fluctuation display image in units of frames) set by the processing of S1302, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

  One frame of the variable display image includes a first image layer (layer) on which a third symbol is drawn, a second image layer on which a background image is drawn, and a third image layer on which a warning character symbol is drawn. In step S1302, the first and third image layers are generated corresponding to the previous effect mode, and the second image layer (image layer on which the background image is drawn) is generated. ) To the one corresponding to the current production mode. Therefore, when the mode change button 22 is operated during high-speed fluctuation and the production mode is changed, only the background image is switched to the new production mode. Can be realized.

  If the effect mode is changed during high-speed fluctuation, the changing mode change flag 273g is kept on until the fluctuation display is completed, so the processing of S1302 is executed and only the background image is changed. The display is changed to that of the (new) production mode and the variable display is continued. Thereafter, as the change display is stopped, the changing mode change flag 273g is turned off, so that the process of S1305 is executed from the next change display, and the change display in the effect mode after the change is the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  In S1303, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter, it is determined whether or not high-speed fluctuation is occurring (S1303). If the result of determination in S1303 is that high-speed fluctuation is in progress (S1303: Yes), the mode change enable flag 273f is turned on (S1304) because it is time to change the effect mode by the mode change button 22. The variation display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1303 is not during high-speed fluctuation (S1303: No), the mode changeable flag 273f is turned off (S1306), the fluctuation display process (S1269) is terminated, and the display effect process. Return to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, each display process (S1275) described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing each display process (S1275) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26).

  In each display process (S1275), first, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1321). If the result of the determination in S1321 is that the customer waiting effect execution flag is on (S1321: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control device 110, so that the customer waiting effect image is switched (S1322). The customer waiting effect execution flag is turned off (S1323), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned on (S1324), and each display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1321 is that the customer waiting effect execution flag is off (S1321: No), as other processing, for example, an error corresponding to when an error command is received from the main control device 110 Processing such as setting an image for display is performed (S1325), each display processing (S1275) is terminated, and the processing returns to the display effect processing (see FIG. 26).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is.

  In the command reception interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1401). At this time, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1402.

  On the other hand, when a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S1406), and a variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. The change effect setting process for setting the change effect data necessary for this is executed (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1402.

  In the process of S1402, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect command has been received (S1402). If the result of determination in S1402 is that a customer waiting effect command has not been received (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403.

  On the other hand, when a customer waiting effect command is received (S1402: Yes), a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) set in the RAM 273 is turned on (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1403.

  In the process of S1403, it is determined whether a start winning command has been received (S1403). If the result of determination in S1403 is that a start winning command has not been received (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1404.

  On the other hand, when a start winning command is received (S1403: Yes), a start port LED lighting control process for controlling lighting of the start port LED 347 is executed (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1404. The details of the start-up LED lighting control process (S1409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether an error command has been received (S1404). As a result of the determination in the process of S1404, if no error command has been received (S1404: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  On the other hand, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), the fourth LED control device 294 is caused to emit light with a lighting pattern according to the received error command (that is, a lighting pattern according to the error content) and normal luminance. Set (S1410, S1411), the process proceeds to S1405.

  The lighting pattern and light emission luminance set in S1410 and S1411 are output to the fourth LED control device 294, and the fourth LED control device 294 is the lighting set in S1410 with the luminance set in S1411 (that is, normal luminance). The notification LED 311 is turned on or blinked in a pattern (that is, a lighting pattern corresponding to the error content). Thus, the brightness of the notification LED 311 is always lit or blinked at the normal brightness regardless of the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode).

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1405). At this time, if no other command has been received (S1405: No), this command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if another command is received (S1405: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1411), and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated. As another process (S1411) according to the command, for example, when the hold number command is received, the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the figure hold number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d) is displayed, when a type command is received, a stop symbol is set, or when an effect time addition / subtraction command is received, addition / subtraction of effect time For example, a notice effect (for example, a slip effect or a return effect) according to a value is determined.

  Next, the starter LED lighting control process (S1209) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the start LED lighting control process (S1209) executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above.

  In the start-up LED lighting control process (S1209), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero (S1341). If the value of the power saving counter 273a is zero as a result of the determination in S1341 (S1341: Yes), the fifth LED control device 295 is set to emit light with normal luminance (S1342), and a predetermined lighting pattern is set. The fifth LED control device 295 is set (S1343), the start-up LED lighting control process (S1209) is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S1341 (S1341: No), it is determined whether the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344). At this time, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 1 (S1344: Yes), the fifth LED control device 295 is set to emit light with medium luminance (S1345), and the process proceeds to S1343.

  If the value of the power saving counter 273a is not 1 as a result of the determination by the processing of S1344, that is, if the value of the power saving counter 273a is 2 (S1344: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is turned off. The setting is made (S1346), the start LED lighting control process (S1209) is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  In the start port LED lighting control process (S1209) described above, the lighting pattern set in S1343 is output to the fifth LED control device 295, and the fifth LED control device 295 starts with the predetermined lighting pattern set in S143. The mouth LED 347 is turned on or blinked.

  The luminance set in S1342, S1345, 1346 is output to the fifth LED control device 295, and the fifth LED control device 295 lights or blinks the start-up LED 347 with the luminance set in S1342, S1345, 1346. .

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the start-up LED 347 is turned on, blinked, or turned off with a different brightness depending on the value of the power saving counter 273a (that is, the set power consumption mode). Specifically, the brightness of the start-up LED 347 is set to normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set, and is set to medium brightness when the power saving mode is set. When the power saving mode is set, the start LED 347 is turned off (that is, the luminance is set to zero).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the power consumption is different depending on the power consumption mode, and the power consumption mode can be changed by operating the power saving button 23. Accordingly, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). Further, by arranging the power saving button 23 at a position where the player can operate, the player who has a high awareness of environmental protection (eco consciousness) can concentrate on the game without feeling guilty about power consumption. Can do.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode), the brightness of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 347 is higher than that in the case where the normal consumption mode is set. Since it is dropped (decreased), the player can realize that power is saved by changing the appearance. In addition, since the brightness of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 347 is reduced, the atmosphere of the effect is also changed (the atmosphere is switched), so that the player also changes to the atmosphere of such an effect. You can also feel that you are saving electricity. Similarly, in the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the large power saving mode), the amount of movement of the production movable body 361 is reduced, so that the player saves power depending on the appearance and production atmosphere that change accordingly. You can feel that

  Furthermore, not only can the power consumption mode be changed by the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player, but even in the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the large power saving mode), the specific electrical components are normally operated. Since it is configured to operate or emit light, it is possible to provide a player with a suitable game such as maintaining the fun of production while saving power.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 40. In the above-described first embodiment, when the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode) is set, a predetermined electrical component (light emitting means such as the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, or the effect, among the plurality of electrical components) In other words, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the brightness and the operation amount of the production movable body 361 and the like.

  In the second embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, as in the large power saving mode in the first embodiment, the predetermined light-emitting means and the production movable body are not operated (that is, the light is turned off or the operation is stopped). To reduce power consumption. However, when the light emitting means and the production movable body are not operated, the power consumption can be suppressed, while the visual effect (for example, the production effect) carried by the light emission means and the production movable body is reduced, and the game There is a possibility that inconveniences such as loss of interest will occur. As a countermeasure, in the second embodiment, in the power saving mode, a pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means or the production movable body that is the target of power saving (that is, turned off or stopped in operation) is displayed as the third image. It is configured to display on the symbol display device 81. Note that, in the second embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 31, how the operation of main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the power consumption mode is composed of three types of modes, that is, the normal power consumption mode, the power saving mode, and the power saving mode. However, in the second embodiment, the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode. The power consumption mode is composed of two types of modes: a power consumption mode and a power saving mode in which power consumption by electrical components is smaller than that in the normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a list of operations of main electrical components according to the power consumption mode in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 31, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electrical components operate with normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, except for the notification LED 311, the first symbol display device 37, the second display symbol display device 83, and the third symbol display device 81, Each light emitting means is turned off. More specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, light emitting means for production (inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, presentation button LEDs 323, decoration LEDs 341 , 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346), the start opening LED 347, and the specific winning opening LED 348 are turned off. In the power saving mode, the operation of the effect movable body 361 is also stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, in the power saving mode, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346, the start opening LED 347, and the specific prize opening LED 348 as the light emitting means for production are turned off. . However, when these LEDs (light emitting means) are turned off, various inconveniences may occur. For example, if the light emitting means for effects such as the decoration LEDs 341 and 342 are turned off, the effect of lighting or blinking by the light emitting means for effects may be lost, and the interest of the game may be reduced. In addition, when the special winning opening LED 348 is turned off, it becomes difficult to recognize that the player is in the jackpot game, and the joy and fun that the player feels for being in the jackpot game is reduced. There is a possibility of letting you. Similarly, if the operation of the production movable body (production movable body 361) is stopped by setting the power saving mode for the production movable body, there may be a disadvantage that the interest of the game is lowered. .

  In order to suppress these inconveniences, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment displays a pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to the light emitting means and the movable body for production when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. It is configured to display on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, A third symbol display device 81 in which a notification lamp display unit 443, a pseudo start port lamp display unit 444, and a pseudo specific winning port lamp display unit 445 are formed by the opening 86a of the center frame 86 as a pseudo image of the light emitting means. It is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the viewing area.

  The pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441 includes a first pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441a provided on the upper left side of the screen and a second pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441b provided on the upper right side of the screen. The pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (441a, 441b) (that is, in the hatched area), the pseudo image is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the lighting pattern of the decoration LEDs 341, 342 in the normal consumption mode. As a display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441 (441a, 441b) in the power saving mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined color) is displayed on the pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441. The entire area is displayed in a blinking manner, or the position or color gradation of a predetermined image (for example, a round image or a fish image) flows in a predetermined direction within the area of the pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441. Various display modes such as such a mode can be adopted. In addition, it is not necessary that the first pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441a and the second pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441b have a symmetric display mode, and various display modes with high production effects can be adopted.

  The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is adjacent to the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442a provided on the lower left side of the screen adjacent to the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b. And a second pseudo side lamp display unit 442b provided on the lower right side of the screen. The pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345, nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is set in the power saving mode. In the area (442a, 442b) (that is, in the hatched area), the pseudo image is displayed in a display mode according to the lighting pattern of the side LEDs 343 to 345 in the normal consumption mode. It should be noted that various display modes can be adopted for the display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 (442a, 442b) in the power saving mode as well as the pseudo decorative lamp display unit 441 described above.

  The pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 is provided at the upper center of the screen, more specifically, between the first pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441a and the second pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441b. The pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the notification LED 346, nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and when the power saving mode is set, the notification LED 346 in the normal consumption mode is displayed. At the lighting timing, a predetermined image is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking) in the area of the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 (that is, in the hatched area).

  The pseudo start port lamp display unit 444 is provided at the lower center of the screen, more specifically, between the pseudo specific winning port lamps 445a and 445b. The pseudo start port lamp display unit 444 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the start port LED 347. Nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and when the power saving mode is set, the start in the normal consumption mode is started. At the lighting timing of the mouth LED 347 (that is, the timing at which a ball wins the first entrance 64), the predetermined image is displayed within the area of the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 (that is, within the hatched area). It is displayed in a display mode (for example, lighting or blinking).

  The pseudo specific winning port lamp display unit 445 includes a first pseudo specific winning port lamp display unit 445a provided between the first pseudo side lamp display unit 442a and the pseudo start port lamp display unit 444, and a second pseudo It comprises a second pseudo specific winning opening lamp display section 445b provided between the side lamp display section 442b and the pseudo start opening lamp display section 444. The pseudo specific prize opening lamp display unit 445 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the specific prize opening LED 348, nothing is displayed in the normal consumption mode, and when the power saving mode is set, a predetermined image is displayed. It is displayed in a predetermined display mode (for example, lighting or blinking). In the present embodiment, the display mode of the pseudo specific prize opening lamp display unit 445 when the power saving mode is set is a display mode in which the open / close state of the specific prize opening 65a is known. For example, the specific prize opening 65a is opened. When the specific winning opening lamp display section 445 is lit in red, and the specific winning opening 65a is closed, the pseudo specific winning opening lamp display section 445 is lit in yellow. That is, in the power saving mode, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is expressed by the display content of the pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the pseudo images corresponding to the light emitting means are displayed on the lamp display portions 441 to 445 in the power saving mode, the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321-323, 341 to 348) It is possible to avoid inconveniences that may occur when the lights are turned off.

  For example, lighting means for effects such as decoration LEDs 341 and 342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LED 346 play a role of giving information on the state of the game to the player by being turned on or blinking. If this state is advantageous to the player, the player can feel a sense of expectation or the like by the light emission mode of the light emitting means for production. For this reason, when the light emitting means for the effect is turned off in the power saving mode, information relating to the state of the game cannot be obtained from the light emitting means for the effect, and accordingly, information that can be enjoyed by the player (expectation) Information and information regarding changes in game state), and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the game state, thereby reducing the interest of the game. In addition, the effect light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking. Therefore, if it is turned off in the power saving mode, the effect of the effect may be lost and the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means to be turned off is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 in a mode corresponding to the lighting pattern of each LED 341-346. Therefore, problems (decrease in information relating to games and reduction in presentation effects) that can occur when the light emitting means are turned off can be suppressed.

  Further, the specific prize opening LED 348 serves to make the player recognize that the game is a big hit game that provides an advantageous state for the player by opening the specific prize opening 65a. When the mouth LED 348 is turned off in the power saving mode, there is a possibility that the joy and fun that the player feels for being in the jackpot game may be reduced. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the pseudo image corresponding to the specific prize opening LED 348 is displayed at the same lighting timing as the specific prize opening LED 348, joy and fun to be in the jackpot game. Can be provided to the player in the same manner as when the specific winning opening LED 348 is turned on.

  In addition, the start-up LED 347 emits light (lights up and flashes) every time an opportunity to win a big hit (that is, a winning of a ball to the first entrance 64) occurs. Therefore, the player recognizes that the trigger for the big hit lottery has occurred when the start LED 347 emits light, and expects that the big hit lottery will be selected in the big hit lottery. In other words, the start-up LED 347 plays a role of giving the player a sense of expectation based on the occurrence of the jackpot lottery. When the start-up LED 347 is turned off in the power saving mode, there is a possibility that the interest of the game is lowered without fulfilling the above role. However, the pseudo image corresponding to the start opening LED 347 to be turned off is displayed at the same lighting timing as that of the specific winning opening LED 348 (that is, the timing at which the ball is won at the first winning opening 64 and the opportunity for the big hit lottery occurs). Therefore, the player can recognize that the opportunity for the big win lottery has occurred as in the case where the specific winning opening LED 348 is turned on, and can thereby expect that the big win will be selected in the big win lottery. .

  In general, the third symbol display device 81 is a part for displaying the big hit lottery after the variable display, so that the player's consciousness is easily concentrated. In the present embodiment, instead of turning off the light emitting means in the power saving mode, the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 where the player's consciousness is likely to concentrate. The pseudo image can be recognized sufficiently or easily by the player. Therefore, this pseudo image (substitute image) can be made to function sufficiently as a substitute for the light-emitting means turned off, and the light-emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) are turned off in the power saving mode. Inconveniences that may occur with this can be avoided.

  In addition, since each display unit 441 to 445 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents (for example, variable display of symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And the visibility of various effects) can be prevented from being reduced by the display of the pseudo image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress inconvenience (for example, a reduction in production effect) that may be caused by a decrease in the visibility of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 are light emitting means corresponding to the pseudo images displayed on the display units 441 to 443, that is, the decoration LED 341, respectively. .342, side LEDs 343 to 345, and notification LEDs 346 are positioned in accordance with the arrangement of these LEDs 341 to 346, effectively functioning as an alternative to these LEDs 341 to 346, and effective reduction of visual effects caused by the extinction of these LEDs 341 to 346 Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is easily recognized by the player as described above, the pseudo image is displayed even if the power saving mode display 88 is not displayed as in the first embodiment described above. The pseudo image enables the player to realize that power is being saved. Note that not only the pseudo image but also the power saving mode display 88 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, each pseudo image displayed on each of the display units 441 to 445 is different from the first to third image layers (layers) for displaying the variation and effect of the design. The fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image is formed on the front side of the image layer (first to third image layers) for displaying the variation and effect of the design, that is, the player. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by being superimposed on the closer side. As a result, the pseudo image can be displayed without reducing each data such as the variable display data stored in the character ROM 275, and the control load of the effect control device 117 (MPU 271) associated with the display of the pseudo image is displayed. Increase is suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in the present embodiment, the special figure reservation number display unit 87 is configured to be displayed at a position that does not overlap the display units 441 to 445. Thereby, even if it is a case where a pseudo image is displayed on each display part 441-445, since a pseudo image and the special figure reservation number display part 87 do not overlap, when displaying a pseudo image, a special figure reservation number There is no need to change the display position of the display unit 87. Also in this point, an increase in the control load of the effect control device 117 accompanying the display of the pseudo image is suppressed.

  FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram for explaining a pseudo image corresponding to the effect movable body. As shown in FIG. 33, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, instead of operating the effect movable body 361, a pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed in the third symbol display device. 81.

  When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pseudo image 451 is displayed at a timing at which the effect movable body 361 is operated, and the movement of the effect movable body 361 is expressed by a moving image. In the example shown in FIG. 33, two cloud-shaped pseudo images 451 appear from the left side of the screen (left side in front view) and are moved in the direction of the arrow X2. Note that the movement of the pseudo image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the movement of the image in one direction (the direction of the arrow X2) as shown in FIG. Various actions that can be expressed can be adopted.

  When the effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable to make the same shape as the effect movable body 361 overlapping the screen, and to make the movement (movement direction, movement speed) of the pseudo image 451 the same as the effect movable body 361. That is, when both the presentation movable body 361 and the pseudo image 451 are displayed, the pseudo image 451 is formed and moved so that the presentation movable body 361 overlaps the front of the pseudo image 451. preferable. Thereby, even when the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped, it is possible to produce an effect as if the effect movable body 361 is operating. A similar effect can be obtained.

  Further, the movement of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the movement of the effect movable body 361 provided in the pachinko machine 10 do not have to be the same, and these movements are different. Also good. Since the moving image has a higher degree of freedom of movement than the movement of the production movable body 361 operated by electric parts such as a solenoid and a motor, the movement of the pseudo image 451 is compared with the movement of the production movable body 361. It is possible to make complex movements. By making the movement of the pseudo image 451 more complex than the movement of the production movable body 361, the appearance and the appearance of the light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 348) are turned off and gorgeous. It becomes possible to compensate for the reduction of the height. On the other hand, by making the movement of the pseudo image 451 and the movement of the production movable body 361 the same, the player is not given a sense of incongruity due to the difference between the production in the normal consumption mode and the production in the power saving mode. A sense of security can be given to the player.

  Similarly, the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 does not have to be the same as the shape of the effect movable body 361 provided in the pachinko machine 10, and these shapes are different. May be. When the shape of the pseudo image 451 displayed in the power saving mode is different from the shape of the effect movable body 361, it is possible to make an effect peculiar to the power saving mode and to provide added value by setting the power saving mode. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo image 451 is different from the first to third image layers for displaying design variations and effects, and the fourth image layer for displaying the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means. 5 image layers. As a result, the contents displayed on the first to third image layers, which are image layers for displaying the variation and effect of the design (that is, the variation display and the effect of the design) are also displayed on the fourth image layer. The pseudo image 451 can be displayed without affecting the pseudo image corresponding to the displayed light emitting means. Therefore, instead of using dedicated variable display data and effect data including the pseudo image 451, the pseudo image 451 can be displayed by the moving image data of the pseudo image 451, and the moving image data can be reused in various scenes. This is advantageous in terms of storage capacity. In the example shown in FIG. 33, the fifth image on which the pseudo image 451 is formed is arranged behind the first to fourth image layers (that is, the side away from the player). The arrangement order is not particularly limited.

  The effect movable body 361 moves in front of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the shape and movement of the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 are represented by the effect movable object 361. In the case of the same movement, only moving image data (variable display data and effect data) including the pseudo image 451 may be prepared. For example, when an effect shutter member that overlaps in front of the screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is provided as the effect movable body 361 when closed, the variable display corresponding to the effect that the effect shutter member opens and closes. For data and effect data, moving image data including a pseudo image 451 corresponding to the shutter member for effect is prepared. When moving image data including the pseudo image 451 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pseudo image 451 instead of the effect movable body 361 is visually recognized by the player in the power saving mode. On the other hand, even in the normal consumption mode, since the effect movable body 361 is located in front of the pseudo image 451, the player visually recognizes the effect movable body 361. There is no problem even if the pseudo image 451 is displayed at the back of the screen. Therefore, in such a case, it is only necessary to prepare the moving image data including the pseudo image 451 instead of both the variable display data and the effect data and the moving image data of the pseudo image 451, which is advantageous in terms of storage capacity. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode, so that the operation of the effect movable body 361 is stopped. Inconveniences that may occur can be avoided. In other words, the production movable body 361 plays a role of enhancing the production effect by its operation. Therefore, when the operation of the production movable body 361 is stopped in the power saving mode, the production effect is lost and the game is interesting. May be reduced. However, since the pseudo image 451 corresponding to the effect movable body 361 is displayed as a moving image on the third symbol display device 81, this can compensate for a decrease in effect due to the stop of the operation of the effect movable body 361. it can.

  FIG. 34 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, there are two types of power consumption modes, the normal power consumption mode and the power saving mode. Therefore, in the RAM 273 of the second embodiment, the large power saving mode flag 273c is omitted, and the power saving counter 273a is used instead. A power saving flag 273h is provided. Further, the RAM 273 of the second embodiment has a start winning flag 273i.

  The power saving flag 273h is a flag indicating which of the two power consumption modes (the normal power consumption mode and the power saving mode) is set. When the power saving flag 273h is set to on (ie, “1”), this indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and when the power saving mode is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, the normal power consumption mode is set. The power saving flag 273h is turned off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is alternately switched on and off every time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The start winning flag 273i is a flag indicating that a ball has won a prize at the first entrance 64 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. When the start winning flag 273i is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that a ball has won the first entrance 64 in the power saving mode. The start winning time flag 273i is set to ON when a ball wins the first entrance 64 in the power saving mode, and when the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start opening lamp display unit 444 accompanying the winning is finished, Set to off (ie, “0”). The start winning flag 273i is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 40, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, each control process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. Further, the startup process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the second embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the second embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 is completed, and then repeatedly, like the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above. Executed.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the main process of the second embodiment, the pseudo lamp display process (S2101) is executed after the effect movable body control process (S1107), so that the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from the main process.

  Specifically, in the main process of the second embodiment, a power consumption setting process for setting a power consumption mode according to the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). Note that the processing content of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), the effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). In the second embodiment, all three types of effect modes can be selected by the mode change button 22 regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter update process (S1225) in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed. Each time, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is incremented by one, and when the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 2, the value of the effect mode counter 273b is changed to a process of clearing to zero.

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103). At this time, when 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: Yes), the sound lamp effect process is executed (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105, and 1 ms or more has not elapsed. In this case (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105. Note that the processing content of the sound lamp effect processing (S1104) of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, in the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode in the variable display process of S1269 or the jackpot effect process of S1273, etc. At the timing when the movable body 361 is operated, a fifth image layer (an image layer for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the movable movable body) is displayed as a pseudo image (for example, a pseudo image 451) corresponding to the rendering movable body 361. Is formed and displayed on the other image layers. The pseudo image is formed on the fifth image layer based on the moving image data of the pseudo image.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of this embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1107, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, a pseudo lamp display process that is a process of displaying the pseudo image corresponding to the light emitting means on each of the display units 441 to 445 is executed (S2101). Details of the pseudo lamp display process (S2101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the pseudo lamp display process (S2101) or when it is determined in S1105 that 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: No), the first embodiment described above. Similarly to S, the processing of S1108 to S1112 is executed.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating power consumption mode setting processing (S1101) according to the second embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is confirmed whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, when the power saving button 23 is operated as a result of checking in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201). If the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S2201, the power saving flag 273h is set to on (S2202), while if the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes). Then, the power saving flag 273h is set to OFF (S2203). Then, after the process of S2202 or S2203, the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  Next, an audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1104) of the second embodiment.

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1104) of the present embodiment, a lamp output process (S1241) is first executed. Note that the lamp output process (S1241) of the second embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment described above, and various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310) provided on the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, the game board 13, and the like. , 321 to 323, 341 to 346), the contents of the process differ from the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. . After the lamp output process (S1241), the effect button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1242) as in the first embodiment.

  After performing the effect button input monitoring / effect process (S1242), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241). If the power saving flag 273h is off as a result of the determination by the processing of S2241, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2241: No), as in the first embodiment described above, The lamp editing process (S1243), the sound editing / output process (S1244), and the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245) are executed, the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is on as a result of the determination in the processing of S2241 (S2241: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are the light emission means to be controlled, Since 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, it is not necessary to set a lighting pattern for these light emitting means. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S1243) is skipped, and the sound editing / output process (S1244) and the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1245) are executed as in the first embodiment described above. The sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S1243) is not executed when the power saving flag 273h is on (S2241: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S1243) may be executed.

  Next, the lamp output process (S1241) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) of the second embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S1251). If the big hit is made (S1251: Yes), whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on is determined. It is determined (S2251).

  If the power saving flag 273h is OFF as a result of the determination by the processing of S2251, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2251: No), as in the first embodiment described above, The sixth LED control device 296 is set to emit light with normal luminance (S1252), and the process proceeds to S2252.

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S2251, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2251: Yes), the sixth LED control device 296 is The extinction is set (S2253), and the process proceeds to S2252. As a result of the processing of S2253, the specific winning opening LED 348 is turned off. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as an alternative to the turned off specific winning opening LED 348, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific winning opening LED 348 (substitute image) ) Is displayed on the pseudo specific winning opening lamp display unit 445 (see S2265 in FIG. 39).

  If the result of determination in S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process proceeds to S2252. In S2252, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S2252). If the power saving flag 273h is OFF as a result of the determination by the processing of S2252 (S2252: No), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are controlled by the normal luminance as in the first embodiment described above. Light emission is set (S1254), the lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed last time is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296 (S1255), and lamp output processing is performed. To return to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, when the power saving flag 273h is turned on as a result of the determination by the process of S2252 (S2252: Yes), the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 are similar to the first embodiment described above. The extinction is set (S1258), the lamp output process is terminated, and the process returns to the audio lamp effect process (see FIG. 37). As a result of the processing in S1258, the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346, which are the light emitting means for production, are turned off, but according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the light emitting means for production that has been turned off is displayed. As an alternative, a pseudo image is displayed on each of the display units 441 to 443 (see S2263 in FIG. 39). After the process of S1258, the lamp output process is terminated, and the process returns to the audio lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, the pseudo lamp display process (S2101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a pseudo lamp display process (S2101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the second embodiment described above.

  In the pseudo lamp display process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S2261). At this time, when the power saving flag 273h is off (S2261: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and the pseudo image is displayed on each of the display units 441 to 445 on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is not necessary to display, in such a case, the pseudo lamp display process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is on and the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2261: Yes), the pseudo lamp editing process is executed (S2262). The pseudo lamp editing process (S2262) is a process corresponding to the lamp editing process (S1243) executed in the normal consumption mode, and the display units 441 to 445 correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. This is a process for setting the display mode of the pseudo image displayed on the screen.

  After the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), a pseudo image is displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 442, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, and the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process. Is controlled to be displayed in the set display mode (S2263). As an alternative to the light emitting means for production that has been turned off by setting the power saving mode by the processing of S2263 (in this embodiment, alternatives to the LEDs 341 to 346), a pseudo decorative lamp display unit 442 and a pseudo side lamp display unit 442 , And the pseudo notification lamp display unit 443 displays pseudo images corresponding to the light emitting means.

  After the processing of S2263, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is winning (S2264). If the jackpot is winning (S2264: Yes), the pseudo specific winning a prize mouth is based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262). Control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed on the lamp display unit 445 in the set display mode (S2265). In step S2265, a pseudo image corresponding to the specific prize opening LED 348 is displayed on the pseudo specific prize opening lamp display unit 445 as an alternative to the specific prize opening LED 348 which is turned off when the power saving mode is set.

  After the process of S2265, the process proceeds to S2266. If the result of the determination in S2264 is not a big hit (S2264: No), the process of S2265 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2266.

  In S2266, it is determined whether or not the start winning flag 273i is on (S2266). If the start winning flag 273i is turned on as a result of the determination in S2266 (S2266: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start lamp display unit 444 ( S2267).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S2267, when it is not the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start port lamp display unit 444, that is, when the pseudo image is continuously displayed on the pseudo start port lamp display unit 444 (S2267: No), based on the display mode set in the pseudo lamp editing process (S2262), control is performed so that the pseudo image is displayed in the set display mode on the pseudo start lamp display unit 444 (S2268). The pseudo lamp display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). In step S2268, a pseudo image corresponding to the start port LED 347 is displayed on the pseudo start port lamp display unit 444 as an alternative to the start port LED 347 which is turned off when the power saving mode is set.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S2267, when it is the timing to end the display of the pseudo image on the pseudo start lamp display unit 444 (S2267: Yes), the start winning flag 273i is set to OFF ( S2269), the pseudo lamp display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35). If the start winning flag 273i is off (S2266: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S2266, the pseudo lamp display process is terminated because it is not the timing to display the pseudo image on the pseudo start lamp display unit 444. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the start port LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start-up LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment. The start-up LED lighting control process (S1409) of the second embodiment is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29). Of the processes executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29), the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are executed except for the start-up LED lighting control process (S1409) shown in FIG. Is done.

  In the start-up LED lighting control process (S1409) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S2341). At this time, when the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S2341: No), the fifth LED control device 295 is the same as in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the light emission at the normal luminance is set (S1342), a predetermined lighting pattern is set for the fifth LED control device 295 (S1343), the start-up LED lighting control processing is terminated, and the command reception interrupt processing is performed. Return to (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S2341, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S2341: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, the fifth LED control device 295 is set to be turned off (S1346). As a result of the processing of S1346, the start opening LED 347 is turned off. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a pseudo image corresponding to the start opening LED 347 is simulated as an alternative to the turned off start opening LED 347. It is configured to display on the start port lamp display unit 444 (see S2268 in FIG. 39). After the process of S1346, the start winning flag 273i is set to ON (S2342), the start LED lighting control process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, predetermined electrical components (such as the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the decoration LEDs 341 and 342 are not included. Light emitting means and production movable body 361 such as production movable body 361 are turned off or stopped, while a pseudo image (substitute image) corresponding to a predetermined electrical component subjected to such power saving, It is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the display mode according to the light emission mode and the operation mode of the electrical component.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is possible to suppress a reduction in visual effect (for example, a reduction in production effect) that accompanies the extinguishment of electrical components or the stoppage of operation. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 used for performing the symbol display and the jackpot effect is used as a display device used for displaying the pseudo image, the electrical component is turned off or the operation is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce power consumption (power saving). That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, since it is possible to suppress a decrease in visual effect (for example, a production effect) in the power saving mode, a suitable game in which a decrease in the interest of the game is suppressed while saving power. Can be provided to the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 50. In the third embodiment, when the power saving mode is set, the change display of the symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD, and power saving is configured by 7-segment LEDs which consume less power than the LCD. By using the symbol display device 181, power consumption is reduced. Note that, in the third embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, it will be described how the operation of main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode in the third embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, the power consumption mode includes two modes: a normal power consumption mode and a power saving mode in which power consumption by electrical components is smaller than that in the normal power consumption mode. Consists of different modes.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a list of operations of main electric components according to the power consumption mode in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 41, also in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the normal consumption mode, the listed electrical components operate with normal brightness and operation amount.

  On the other hand, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, light emitting means for effects (inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, effect button LEDs 323, decorative LEDs 341 and 342, side Among the LEDs 343 to 345 and the notification LED 346), each light emitting means other than the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 (that is, the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, the effect button LED 323, the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, the side LEDs 343 to 345, and All the notification LEDs 346) are turned off. On the other hand, for the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, the luminance is lowered from normal luminance to medium luminance.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, only the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are lit (or blinked) with medium luminance among the light emitting means for production. In the power saving mode, all the light emitting means for performance (decorative LEDs 341, 342, side LEDs 343-345, and notification LED 346) provided on the game board 13 are turned off, but the inner peripheral LED 301 surrounding the game board 13 is surrounded. By turning on or blinking .about.304, it is possible to suppress the impression of the game board 13 that turns the line of sight when the player executes the game. At that time, since the luminance of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal luminance to the middle luminance, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are also reduced in power consumption as compared with the normal consumption mode, and have a preferable power saving effect. Can be obtained.

  In addition, the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 arranged farther away from the game board 13 than the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the respective light emitting means (the lower dish LEDs 321 and 322 and the effect button LED 323) provided in the lower dish unit 15 are Since the percentage that the player is aware of during the game is relatively low, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are turned on or off even if these light emitting means (the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323) are turned off. By making it blink, it is possible to achieve both a power saving effect and an effect.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the notification LED 311, the specific winning opening LED 348, the first symbol display device 37, and the second display symbol display device even when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. As for 83, the normal luminance remains the same as in the first and second embodiments described above.

  Therefore, by keeping the brightness of the notification LED 311 at the normal brightness regardless of the power consumption mode, various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall. It is possible to quickly resolve the game so that the player can quickly return to the game, or to detect fraud early. Further, by leaving the luminance of the specific winning opening LED 348 at the normal luminance, it is ensured to the player that the special winning opening 65a is being opened and provides a state advantageous to the player by being opened. It can be recognized, and it can be prevented that the joy and fun that the player feels for being in the jackpot game is reduced.

  In addition, devices such as the first symbol display device 37 and the second display symbol display device 83 that display a lottery result related to the player's profit so that the player can visually recognize the player always have a normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode. As a result, the player can surely see the result related to his / her own profit, and the player can be prevented from having distrust or dissatisfaction regarding the lottery.

  On the other hand, unlike the first and second embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power. However, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, it is impossible to display a decorative symbol (third symbol) indicating the lottery result. The stop symbol indicating the lottery lottery result is also displayed by the lighting color of the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37, but the player tends to pay attention to the decorative third symbol that allows the lottery result to be easily identified. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off in the power saving mode and the third symbol cannot be seen, the player cannot determine the jackpot lottery result. Therefore, for example, after winning the first entrance 64, if the player has difficulty grasping the lottery result, and the tempo of the game has deteriorated, or if the player continues to lose, the 1st entrance There is a possibility that inconveniences such as suspicion of whether or not the lottery that should have been performed with the winning of 64 is actually performed may occur.

  In order to suppress such inconvenience, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a power saving symbol display device 181 composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and is switched to the third symbol display device 81 in the power saving mode. The power saving symbol display device 181 is used to display a stop symbol. As shown in FIG. 41, the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off in the normal consumption mode, and is turned on with normal luminance when the power saving mode is set. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the stop symbol is displayed numerically on the power saving symbol display device 181 which is a 7-segment LED instead of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can win the jackpot immediately after the symbol stops. The result can be easily discriminated, and the inconveniences exemplified above can be prevented. Further, since the 7-segment LED consumes less power than an LCD such as the 3rd symbol display device 81, a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off by turning off the backlight of the LCD in the power saving mode, and the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. Thus, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be returned early.

  Next, the power saving symbol display device 181 described above will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.42 (a) is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the power-saving symbol display apparatus 181, FIG.42 (b) is a sectional side view in the bb line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the power saving symbol display device 181 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, and appears when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. Is provided on the front side of the shutter member 180 (the side facing the player). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 42A, the power-saving symbol display device 181 places three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c in the vertical direction (front view) near the right end portion on the front side of the left shutter member 180L. (Up and down direction) arranged side by side. Although not shown, the substrate for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) is provided on the back surface side of the left shutter member 180L.

  The shutter member 180 is a left shutter member 180L that appears from the left side of the opening 86a of the center frame 86 and covers the left side of the viewing area of the third symbol display device 81 (the region of the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a). The right shutter member 180R appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81. These shutter members 180L and 180R are supported by drive units (not shown) so that the upper and lower sides thereof can be moved in the left-right direction.

  A drive unit (not shown) serves as an operating device (not shown) for moving the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R, and a motor capable of positioning control, such as a servo motor or a stepping motor, and the rotation of the rotor of the motor. It has a rack and pinion mechanism that converts motion into linear motion. Since the moving mechanism of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R is a known technique, its details are omitted, but the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are straight lines converted from the rotational motion of the motor by the rack and pinion mechanism. Move left and right by movement.

  When the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode, the shutter member 180 is in an open state in which the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are housed in the center frame 86. When the shutter member 180 is in the open state, the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, and the player can display the variation display of the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the jackpot effect. Etc. can be visually recognized.

  When the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the motor of the operating device (not shown) is driven and controlled, so that the left shutter member 180L moves in the right closing movement direction (arrow ML direction). The right shutter member 180R moves in the leftward closing movement direction (arrow MR direction). The left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are stopped in a state where they are in contact with each other substantially at the center of the opening 86a of the center frame 86, thereby forming a closed state.

  When the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 42B, the viewing area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol display device 81 visible from the opening 86a). Region) is covered by the shutter member 180.

  As described above, the power-saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) is provided on the front side (the side facing the player) of the left shutter member 180L, so that the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in the open state. If the shutter member 180 is in the closed state, it appears and becomes visible. That is, the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) appears and becomes visible when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. Thus, the player can recognize that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode from the closed state of the shutter member 180 in the closed state and the appearance of the power saving symbol display device 181.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81 when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and uses the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) instead. It is configured to display a stop symbol (a result of the jackpot lottery). Of the three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c, the first 7-segment LED 181a arranged at the top corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1 (see FIG. 6) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The second 7-segment LED 181b disposed in the middle corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the third 7-segment LED 181c disposed in the lowermost stage is the third symbol display device 81. This corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3 displayed in FIG.

  In the power saving mode, these 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c are variably displayed, and then a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery is represented by a number and stopped. That is, when the probable big hit is selected by the big win lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers (for example, combinations of the same odd values) indicating that the probable big win is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c as stop symbols. When a normal jackpot is selected by the jackpot lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers (for example, combinations of the same even value) indicating that the jackpot is a normal jackpot is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c. . On the other hand, when the winning is selected by the big hit lottery, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating that it is out is stopped and displayed on the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c as stop symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, the left shutter member 180L is formed with a notch 180La above the end on the right side (the side of the left shutter member 180L in the closing movement direction). Similarly, the right shutter member 180R is formed with a notch 180Ra below an end on the left side (the side in the closing movement direction of the right shutter member 180R). When the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in the closed state, the player can face the screen of the third symbol display device 81 from these notches 180La, 180Ra.

  As described above, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, so that the screen of the third symbol display device 81 facing from the notches 180La and 180Ra is a black screen. is there. Therefore, the player can confirm the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 through the notches 180La and 180Ra, and knows that the third symbol display device 81 is turned off based on the confirmation. be able to. Therefore, from the state of the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 which can be visually recognized through the notches 180La and 180Ra, it can be felt that it is cooperating with power saving.

  FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram for explaining a process in which the power-saving symbol display device 181 shifts to the closed state. When the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment turns off the third symbol display device 81, but the third symbol display device 81 is turned off when the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Instead of erasing the contents instantaneously (turning off the light), the display contents are gradually reduced, and after the display contents are reduced to a predetermined size, the display contents are erased.

  Specifically, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced as shown in FIG. At this time, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area illuminated with a predetermined color. As the lighting color (predetermined color) of the region 81b, various colors such as black and red can be adopted. Then, after the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size, the display content of the display area 81a is erased.

  On the other hand, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is gradually moved in the closing movement direction (arrow ML direction, arrow MR direction) in accordance with the reduction speed of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the shutter member 180 is gradually moved in the closing movement direction so as to increase the overlap with the area 81b that is enlarged as the display area 81a is reduced. Then, after the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the display content of the display area 81a is erased, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are moved to positions where they are in contact with each other (that is, until they are completely closed). Let

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the player can temporarily view both the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181. Has been. Therefore, the player compares the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with the display content of the power saving symbol display device 181 and switches the device to be used as the display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery). Can be observed. As a result, the player can be convinced that there will be no disadvantage such as a change in the stop symbol accompanying the switching from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. You can play without distrust.

  Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in particular, when the symbol variation display is executed when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size. The shutter member 180 is not completely closed until it is displayed on both the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c). In the example shown in FIG. 43, “777” is displayed as a stop symbol in the middle line L2 (see FIG. 6), and “7” is stopped in each of the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181. It is displayed as a symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the character symbol corresponding to the number is displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 6), but in FIG. 43, the character symbol is represented by a number for convenience.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display area 81a is reduced to a predetermined size and the symbol variation display is executed, the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device are used. Since the shutter member 180 is in a completely closed state after the stop symbol is displayed on both 181 and 181, the stop symbol (result of the jackpot lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is legitimate without doubt. It can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from feeling distrust.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) Closed gradually. Therefore, it is possible to impress the player to switch from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode, and to impress the player that power saving is being performed. In particular, since switching from the power consumption mode to the power saving mode is performed by the player operating the power saving button 23, the player visually recognizes the display area 81a that gradually decreases and the shutter member 180 that gradually closes. In some cases, you can feel that you are cooperating in saving electricity.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, a predetermined combination of numbers indicating that the middle line L2 is a big hit is displayed as a stopped symbol, and among the stopped symbols, the number of the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a. The number of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181b, and the number of the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181c, but the predetermined combination of numbers indicating the big hit is valid except for the middle line L2. Also when the line (left line L1, right line L3, right upward line L4, left upward line L5) is aligned, the number of the upper symbol row Z1 is displayed on the 7-segment LED 181a, and the number of the middle symbol row Z2 is 7 segments. What is necessary is just to display on LED181b and to display the number of the lower symbol row | line | zone Z3 on 7 segment LED181c. In addition, when the stop symbol is a combination indicating a disengagement, the numbers of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 arranged on a specific effective line (for example, the middle line L2) are assigned to the 7 segment LEDs 181a to 181c as in the case of the jackpot. Show it.

  FIG. 44 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, since a pseudo image (substitute image) is not displayed, the RAM 273 of the present embodiment has the configuration of the second embodiment excluding the start winning flag 273i (273b, 273d to 273h; see FIG. 34). In addition, a transition flag 273j and a closing start flag 273k are provided.

  The transition flag 273j is a flag indicating whether or not the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is transitioning from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. When the transition flag 273j is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is transitioning. On the other hand, when the transition flag 273j is set to OFF (that is, “0”), the state of the shutter member 180 is not transitioning, that is, the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or completely Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. The transition flag 273j is set to ON when the shutter member 180 starts to be closed or opened due to the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the shutter member 180 is in a completely closed state or a complete state. When in an open state, it is set to off. The transition flag 273j is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 273k is a flag indicating that the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state has started closing. When the closing start flag 273k is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the opened state has started closing. The closing start flag 273k is set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the player operates the power saving button 23 in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 273h is OFF). Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when closing of the shutter 180 is started, the shutter 180 is set to off.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 45 to 50. In addition, each control process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. In addition, the start-up process and the command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 and 29, respectively.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the third embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the third embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 is completed, and then repeatedly, like the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above. Executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the main process of the third embodiment, after the effect movable body control process (S1107), the processes of S3101 to S3104 are executed, so that the main process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Different from processing.

  Specifically, in the main process of the third embodiment, a power consumption setting process for setting a power consumption mode in accordance with the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S1101). Note that the processing content of the power consumption setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the power consumption mode setting process (S1101), the effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S1102). In the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, three types of effect modes are selected by the mode change button 22 regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode or the power saving mode. Both are configured to be selectable. Therefore, although not shown, in the effect mode setting process (S1102) of the present embodiment, the effect mode counter update process in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above. (S1225) is a process of adding 1 to the value of the effect mode counter 273b each time it is executed, and changing the value of the effect mode counter 273b to zero clearing when the value of the effect mode counter 273b exceeds 2. .

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S1102), as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103). At this time, when 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: Yes), the sound lamp effect process is executed (S1104) as in the first embodiment, and the process proceeds to S1105. If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1103: No), the process of S1104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1105.

  In the process of S1105, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105). At this time, if 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: Yes), display effect processing is executed (S1106). Although not shown, the display effect process (S1106) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode.

  After the process of S1106, the effect movable body control process is executed (S1107). Although not shown, the effect movable body control process (S1107) of the present embodiment is skipped when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, as in the second embodiment described above.

  After the process of S1107, a power saving symbol display control process, which is a process for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S3101). Details of the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the power saving symbol display control process (S3101), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102). At this time, when the power saving flag 273h is on (S3102: Yes), the device used as the display device for the stop symbol (a result of the big hit lottery) is changed to the third mode in accordance with the switching from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. A power saving mode transition process that is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S3103). Details of the power saving mode transition processing (S3103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is OFF as a result of the determination by the processing of S3102, (S3102: No), the power saving mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode when the device used as the stop symbol display device is switched. A power saving mode canceling process, which is a process of switching from the design symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S3104). The details of the power saving mode canceling process (S3104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) or the power saving mode release process (S3104), the processes of S1108 to S1112 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. Also, in S1105, when it is determined that 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1105: No), the processing of S1108 to S1112 is executed as in the first embodiment described above. To do.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating power consumption mode setting processing (S1101) according to the third embodiment.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S1101) of the present embodiment, first, as in the first embodiment described above, it is confirmed whether the power saving button 23 has been operated (S1201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S1201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, when the power saving button 23 is operated as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the transition flag 273j is on (S3201). At this time, if the transition flag 273j is on (S3201: Yes), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is transitioning from the open state to the closed state, or from the closed state to the open state. Then, the power consumption mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45). Thus, in this embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is operating, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-migration flag 273j is off as a result of the determination in S3201 (S3201: No), the in-migration flag 273j is set to on (S3202). Next, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201).

  If the result of determination in S2201 is that the power saving flag 273h is off (S2201: No), the power saving flag 273h is set on (S2202), the closing start flag 273k is set on (S3203), and the power consumption The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S2201 is that the power saving flag 273h is on (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 273h is set to off (S2203), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the main process (FIG. Return to 45).

  Next, the lamp output processing (S1241) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) of the third embodiment. The lamp output process (S1241) of the third embodiment is a process executed in the audio lamp effect process (S1104) in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment. Of the processes executed in the audio lamp effect process (S1104), the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are executed except for the lamp output process (S1241) shown in FIG.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S1251). If the jackpot is being hit (S1251: Yes), as in the first embodiment described above, The 6LED control device 296 is set to emit light with normal luminance (S1252), and the process proceeds to S3251. On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1251 is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process of S1252 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3251.

  In S3251, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is on (S3251). At this time, if the power saving flag 273h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S3251: No), the first to third LEDs are the same as in the first embodiment described above. Light emission with normal luminance is set for the control devices 291 to 293 (S1254), and the lighting pattern edited in S1243 executed last time is set to the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293 or the sixth LED control device 296. In step S1255, the lamp output process is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process.

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 273h is turned on as a result of the determination in the process of S3251, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3251: Yes), the first LED control device 291 is Setting is performed so that the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 emit light with medium luminance (S3252). Next, the first LED control device 291 is set so that the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are turned off (S3253), and the second and third LED control devices 292 and 293 are turned off (S3254). As described above, in the power saving mode, since the processing of S3252 to S3254 is executed, only the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are lit (or blinked) with medium luminance among the light emitting means for production, and the other light emitting means (outer periphery) The LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323) are turned off.

  After the process of S3254, the process of S1255 is executed, the lamp output process is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process. However, when the power saving flag 273h is on, the processing of S3253 and S3254 is executed, and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 are turned off. Then, among the lighting patterns edited in S1243 executed last time, the lighting pattern for the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 or the specific prize opening LED 348 is set for the first LED control device 291 or the sixth LED control device 296. In the lamp editing process (S1243), when the power saving flag 273h is on, the lighting patterns of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, the lower pan LEDs 321 and 322, and the effect button LED 323 may not be set.

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the power-saving symbol display control process (S3101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S3101), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 273h is ON (S3401). At this time, when the power saving flag 273h is off (S3401: No), the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, and it is not necessary to perform display by the power saving symbol display device 181. Turns off the power saving symbol display device 181 (S3417), ends the power saving symbol device display control processing, and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S3401 is that the power saving flag 273h is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S3401: Yes), whether or not the jackpot is being hit is determined. It is determined (S3402). If the result of the determination in S3402 is not a big hit (S3402: No), it is determined whether or not it is changing (symbol change display is in progress) (S3403). At this time, if not changing (S3403: No), it is determined whether or not a change start flag (not shown) is on (S3404), similarly to the processing of S1263 of the display effect process (see FIG. 26).

  If the result of determination in S3404 is that the variation start flag is off (S3404: No), each display process is executed (S3416). In each display process (S3416), the process of setting an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, the process of S1322 and the process of setting an image in the process of S1325 are omitted. The same processing as each display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment is executed. After executing each display process (S3416), the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S3417), the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag is on as a result of the determination in the process of S3404 (S3404: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S3405), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is turned off (S3406), and the variation is in progress. The flag 273d is turned on (S3407). After the process of S3407, an initial value is set in a variation time counter (not shown) as in the process of S1267 of the display effect process (see FIG. 26) (S3408).

  After the process of S3408, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S3409). On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S3403 is that there is a fluctuation (S3403: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation time counter (S3415), the process proceeds to S3409, and it is within the fluctuation time. Judgment is made.

  If the result of determination in S3409 is within the variation time (S3409: Yes), variation display by the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S3410). That is, the segment pattern of each of the seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 is varied. After the processing of S3410, the power saving symbol display control device is terminated and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S3409, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S3409: No), the setting is made based on the type command received from the main controller 110. The stopped symbols are displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) (S3411). After the process of S3411, the changing flag 273d is turned off (S3412), the changing mode change flag 273g is turned off (S3413), the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45). .

  If the result of the determination in S3402 is a big hit (S3402: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S3414). In the power saving mode, when a big hit occurs, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the processing of S3414, so that the player recognizes that the big hit is by visually checking this blinking. Can be recognized. In the power saving mode, the display mode of the power saving symbol display device 181 during the jackpot is different from other modes such as changing, so that the game is a jackpot providing a state advantageous to the player. The player can be surely recognized, and the decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electrical components can be suppressed. After the process of S3414, the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the power saving mode transition process (S3103) described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a power saving mode transition process (S3103) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S3103), first, it is determined whether or not the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421). At this time, if the closing start flag 273k is on (S3421: Yes), the player operates the power saving button 23, so that the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, and the shutter member 180 (180L, 180L, In this case, first, the closing start flag 273k is set to OFF (S3422).

  After the process of S3422, the reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are set (S3423), and the process proceeds to S3424. When the processing of S3423 is executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is formed to be reduced at a predetermined reduction speed in the display effect processing (see FIG. 26), and the third symbol display device is formed. 81 is displayed in the display area 81a. On the other hand, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is controlled by a motor of an operating device (not shown) so as to be closed in accordance with the image reduction speed. As a result, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction speed. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as a region that is lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S3421 is that the closing start flag 273k is off (S3421: No), the processing in S3422 and S3423 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3424.

  In S3424, it is determined whether or not the transition flag 273j is on (S3424). At this time, when the transition flag 273j is off (S3424: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely opened state. The migration process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S3424, if the in-transition flag 273j is on (S3424: Yes), it is determined whether or not the shutter member 180 in the transition to the closed state has reached a predetermined position ( S3425). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S3425: No), in order to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, the power saving mode transition process is terminated, and the main process Return to (see FIG. 45).

  If the result of determination in S3425 is that the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position (S3425: Yes), it is determined whether or not the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S3426).

  If the result of determination in S3426 is that it is not stopped (S3426: No), the reduction of the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427), and the process proceeds to S3428. Transition. On the other hand, if it is stopped (S3426: Yes), the process of S3427 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3428.

  In S3428, it is determined whether or not it is changing (design change display is in progress) (S3428). At this time, if not changing (S3428: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol change display has been started (S3429). At this time, if the symbol variation display is not started (S3249: No), the shutter member 180 is closed (or the display area 81a is reduced) by the process of S3427, and then a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). ) Is determined (S3430).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S3430, after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the symbol change display is not executed (that is, S3428: No and S3429: No), and the predetermined time has not elapsed. (S3430: No), the power saving mode transition process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S3430, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 was stopped (S3430: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S3431), and the third The symbol display device 81 is turned off (S3432). Therefore, when the symbol change display is not performed after the shutter member 180 reaches the predetermined position and the closing is stopped, the shutter member 180 is completely closed after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the third The symbol display device 81 is turned off. At this time, since the third symbol display device 81 is turned off after the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player can change the display area from the state where the image is displayed in the display area 81a having a predetermined size. It is difficult to feel a sense of incongruity due to the 81a being erased.

  Further, when the shutter member 180 is completely closed, the player can visually recognize the state of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 only through the notches 180La and 180Ra. Here, when a color such as red is adopted as the lighting color of the region 81b, the color change visually recognized from the notches 180La and 180Ra after the shutter member 180 is completely closed is clearly identified. Can do. Therefore, the player can strongly recognize that it is in the power saving mode by the clear color change, and can strongly feel that he / she cooperates in power saving.

  In S3432, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off by turning off the backlight of the LCD so that the power supply to the image controller 274 is not cut off. By not interrupting the power supply to the image controller 274, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 can be returned early.

  After the process of S3432, the transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3433), the power saving mode transition process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S3428 is that there is a change (S3428: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of a change time counter (not shown) is 0 (S3434). Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S3429, also when the symbol variation display is started (S3429: Yes), the process proceeds to S3434.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S3434, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time is finished (S3434: Yes), the processing proceeds to S3431. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the process of S3431 (complete shutter closing) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the variation time counter is not 0 (S3434: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S3434, the power saving mode transition process is terminated in order to wait for the value of the variation time counter to become 0. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the shutter member 180 reaches the predetermined position and the closing is stopped, or the shutter member 180 is stopped closing. When the symbol variation display is started, the shutter member 180 is not completely closed until the variation display is completed. That is, when the variable display of the symbol is executed in the display area 81a reduced to a predetermined size, the stop symbol is displayed between the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c). The shutter member 180 is configured not to be completely closed until it is displayed on both. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the stop symbol (the result of the jackpot lottery) displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 by setting the power saving mode is legitimate without question. It is possible to suitably prevent a person from having distrust.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the above-described power saving mode cancellation processing (S3104) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode release process (S3104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above.

  In the power saving mode release process (S3104), first, it is determined whether or not the transition flag 273j is on (S3441). At this time, when the transition flag 273j is off (S3441: No), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in the fully opened state. The release process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S3441, if the in-progress flag 273j is on (S3441: Yes), the shutter member 180 is in the fully open state, and in this case, the third symbol display device 81 Is turned on (S3442). When the process of S3442 is executed, the image formed in the display effect process (see FIG. 26) is displayed over the entire viewing area of the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S3442, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S3442). Therefore, when the player operates the power saving button 23 and the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the third symbol display device 81 is turned on, and then the shutter member 180 is completely turned on. Open. At this time, since the shutter member 180 is opened after the third symbol display device 81 is turned on, the dark screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not seen between the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R. Therefore, it is difficult to understand the switching of the third symbol display device 81 from the unlit state to the lit state, and it is difficult to feel uncomfortable switching. After the process of S3442, the transition flag 273j is set to OFF (S3444), the power saving mode release process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 45).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. It is configured as follows. Since the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  In addition, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern that makes it easy to discriminate the result. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the stop symbol according to the third symbol is not displayed, the player has difficulty in grasping the lottery result, thereby causing the game tempo to deteriorate, If the continuation continues, there may be inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery was really or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the jackpot lottery is represented by a combination of numbers using the power saving symbol display device 181. Thus, the above-described inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the display device used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181, the third symbol is displayed. After the display corresponding to the display contents (for example, the symbol change display or the jackpot effect) displayed on the display device 81 is also displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181, the third symbol display device 81 is turned off. It is configured as follows. That is, after displaying the same content on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181, the display device used to display the stop symbol is displayed from the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to switch to the power saving symbol display device 181. Therefore, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the symbol variation display or the stop symbol) and the display content displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 are legitimate and unquestionable. This can be clearly indicated to the player, and the player can be suitably prevented from feeling distrust.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the power saving mode, only the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 surrounding the game board 13 are turned on (or blinked) among the light emitting means for production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the impression of the game board 13 that turns the line of sight when the player executes the game. In this case, since the brightness of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 is lowered from the normal brightness to the middle brightness, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are also reduced in power consumption as compared with the normal consumption mode. Power saving effect can be obtained.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, as in the third embodiment described above, when the power saving mode is set, the variable display of the symbols is changed to the third symbol display device 81 and the power consumption is less than that of the LCD. By using a power-saving symbol display device 181 composed of segment LEDs, power consumption is reduced. In the fourth embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of an LCD as in the first and second embodiments. In the above-described third embodiment, when the player operates the power saving button 23, the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned on at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. However, in the fourth embodiment, use of the power saving symbol display device 181 is started at the timing when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size. In this 4th Embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st-3rd embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The RAM 273 of the fourth embodiment has a closing stop flag 273l in addition to the configuration of the third embodiment (273b, 273d to 273h, 273j, 273k; see FIG. 44). In FIG. 51, the lower case letter “l” in the block body is indicated by the curly elbow.

  The closing stop flag 273l is a flag indicating whether or not the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) that shifts from the open state to the closed state is stopped at a predetermined position. When the closing stop flag 273l is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 is stopped at a predetermined position. On the other hand, when the closing stop flag 273l is set to OFF (that is, “0”), the shutter member 180 is not stopped at the predetermined position, that is, the shutter member 180 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Indicates that it is in transition, fully closed, or fully open. The closing stop flag 273l is set to ON when the shutter member 180 transitioning from the open state to the closing state reaches a predetermined position, and then set to OFF when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. The closing stop flag 273l is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 52 and 53, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, each control process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 similarly to 3rd Embodiment mentioned above. Further, the start-up process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is also as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19 as in the third embodiment described above.

  Further, the main process of the fourth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117, is skipped when the closing stop flag 273l is on, and the process of the power saving symbol display control process (S3101). And the process similar to the main process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above are executed except that the process of the power saving mode transition process (S3103) is different.

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) of the fourth embodiment is replaced with the process of S3401 in the power saving symbol display control process (see FIG. 48) of the third embodiment. The point which the process (S4401) which discriminate | determines whether 273l is on differs from 3rd Embodiment mentioned above.

  Specifically, in the main process of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the closing stop flag 273l is on (S4401). At this time, if the closing stop flag 273l is off (S4401: No), the process of S3417 is executed as in the third embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the closing stop flag 273l is on as a result of the determination in the process of S3401 (S4401: Yes), the processes of S3402 to S3417 are executed as in the third embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating power saving mode transition processing (S3103) according to the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the power saving mode transition process (S3103) of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3421 to S3426 are executed as in the third embodiment described above. Here, if the shutter member 180 is not stopped at a predetermined position as a result of the determination in the process of S3426 (S3426: No), the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is similar to the third embodiment described above. The reduction and the closing of the shutter member 180 are stopped (S3427).

  After the process of S3427, the closing stop flag 273l is set to ON (S4421). When the closing stop flag 273l is set to ON, use of the power saving symbol display device 181 (181a to 181c) is started (see FIG. 52). Therefore, at this timing, the display of the content corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181.

  After the process of S4421, as in the third embodiment described above, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 by the process of 3427 was stopped (S3430). . If the result of determination in step S3426 is that shutter member 180 is stopped at a predetermined position (S3426: Yes), processing in steps S3427 and S4421 is skipped, and processing proceeds to step S3430.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S3430, when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 was stopped (S3430: No), the power saving mode release process is terminated and the main process (see FIG. 45) Return to. On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 was stopped (S3430: Yes), the closing stop flag 273l is set to OFF (S4422). After the process of S4422, the processes of S3431 to S3433 are executed as in the third embodiment described above.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, similar to the third embodiment described above, the same content is displayed on both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181. Since the display device used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power-saving symbol display device 181 after the operation is performed, the display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The player can clearly indicate that the displayed content (e.g., symbol variation display or stop symbol) and the display content displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 are unquestionable and legitimate, It is possible to suitably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by operating the power saving button 23 (specifically, the display area 81a has a predetermined size). Since the use of the power saving symbol display device 181 is started at the timing reached, the period for using both the third symbol display device 81 and the power saving symbol display device 181 is shortened. Thus, it is possible to more suitably suppress power consumption.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 63. In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the power consumption mode during the game can be switched using the power saving button 23 provided on the front frame 14 (upper plate 17). In the fifth embodiment, by using the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to switch power consumption during the customer waiting effect, thereby suppressing power consumption. Plan. In the fifth embodiment, the same portions as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, a volume control switch 227 is provided in the effect control device 117. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is configured to function also as a changeover switch for determining whether or not to perform power saving during the customer waiting effect.

  The power saving button 23 is provided on the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 10 and is an operator (button) for switching the power consumption mode according to the player's intention, whereas it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The volume control switch 227 is a dedicated operator (switch) for causing the hall employee, not the player, to manage the power saving at the time of waiting for the customer.

  Here, the volume adjustment switch 227 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a front view of the volume adjustment switch 227. The volume adjustment switch 227 is a switch for changing the volume (volume) of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226. The rotary switch 227b (see FIG. 56) and the operation shaft of the rotary switch 227b are manually operated. It is comprised from the operation knob 227a for rotating.

  The rotary switch 227b is a 16-position (contact) rotary switch, and outputs a value of 0 to 15 (0 to F in hexadecimal) according to the position. The position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed by rotating the operation shaft.

  The operation knob 227a is a knob for manually rotating the operation shaft of the rotary switch 227b, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by an operator such as a hall employee. Therefore, when the operator rotates the operation knob 227a, the operation shaft can be rotated, and thereby the position of the rotary switch 227b can be changed. Specifically, the position of the rotary switch 227b can be set by matching the mark 227a1 indicated on the operation knob 227a with any of the values 0 to F indicated around the operation knob 227a. The value (output value) indicated by the mark 227a1 is output from the rotary switch 227b.

  FIG. 55B shows the relationship between the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (that is, the output value from the rotary switch 227b) and the volume setting value. As described above, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 can take 16 levels from 0 to F (hexadecimal number; 0 to 15 in decimal number), and 0 to 0 for each of the 16 level output values. A volume setting value of 8 is assigned. As the volume setting value increases, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 increases. That is, “0”, which is the minimum value of the volume setting value, is the minimum volume that can be taken by the sound emitted from the speaker device 226, and “8”, which is the maximum value of the volume setting value, is released from the speaker device 226. This is the maximum volume that can be heard.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 is “0”, the volume setting value is “0” and the sound is muted. As the output value (the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) increases from “0”, the volume setting value also increases. Specifically, as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value increases by one. When the output value is “8”, the volume setting value becomes “8”, which is the maximum volume.

  In the range where the output value is larger than “8”, that is, in the range of 9 to F (hexadecimal number), as the output value increases, the volume setting value gradually decreases and the volume gradually decreases. Specifically, when the output value is “9”, the volume setting value is “7”, and as the output value increases by one, the volume setting value decreases by one. At the output value “F”, The volume setting value is “1”.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the volume setting value when the output value is “0” is “0”, and the volume setting value when the output value is “F” is “1”. Therefore, either when the operator rotates the operation knob 227a to change the output value from “F” to “0” or from “0” to “F”. It is configured so that a sudden volume change does not occur.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the output value range of 0 to 8 is assigned as the normal specification volume setting range, and the output value range of 9 to F is assigned as the power saving specification volume setting range. ing. The “power saving specification” is a specification for saving power during the customer waiting effect. Specifically, the light emitting means for the effects (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, 341 to 346) are turned off during the customer waiting effect. It is a specification to do. On the other hand, the “normal specification” is a specification that does not turn off the light emitting means for production even during the customer waiting production.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, since the output value assigned to the normal specification is in the range of 0 to 8, the normal specification can take a value of 0 to 8 as the volume setting value. On the other hand, since the output value assigned to the power saving specification is in the range of 9 to F, the power saving specification can take a value of 1 to 7 as the volume setting value.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only in the normal specification but also in the power saving specification, among the plural levels of sound volume that can be set (that is, the sound volume setting value within the range of 1 to 7), A desired volume can be set.

  Here, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, both the normal specification and the power saving specification can be set by the single volume adjustment switch 227 for the range of the volume setting value 1-7. It is configured. That is, only by rotating the operation knob 227a of the volume adjustment switch 227, the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 is adjusted (the setting of the volume setting value within the range of 1 to 7), the normal specification, and the power saving. Both switching with the specification can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a suitable game with a sound volume suitable for the situation while saving power.

  Further, the smaller the volume, the smaller the amount of power consumed by the speaker device 226. Therefore, the volume adjustment switch 227 enables not only power saving during the customer waiting effect according to the power saving specification but also power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, power saving by reducing the volume). Therefore, since it is possible to realize switching of the presence / absence of power saving during the customer waiting effect and adjustment of the volume with a single operator (in this embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227), a person who performs such switching and setting (for example, ), The operation that should be performed by the employees of the hall is easy, and the work load is small.

  Since the maximum volume (volume setting value “7”) that can be obtained with the power saving specification is smaller than the maximum volume (volume setting value “8”) that can be obtained with the normal specification, the volume setting value “8” cannot be set. , Can contribute to power saving. In the present embodiment, the volume setting value “0” is assigned to the normal specification and is not assigned to the power saving specification. However, the volume setting value “0” is not assigned to the normal specification, and the power saving specification. You may comprise so that it may allocate with respect to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the volume setting value is increased or decreased by 1 each time the output value of 16 levels changes by 1 level. The range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the normal specification is 0 to 8, while the range of the volume setting value that can be taken in the power saving specification is 1 to 7. For example, 18 levels of output values can be taken. In this way, the range of the volume setting value that can be taken by the normal specification and the power saving specification may be configured to be 0-8. That is, for example, an output value that is one greater than the output value at which the volume setting value is “8” in the normal specification is assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for the output value is set to “8”. An output value that is one greater than the output value at which “1” is “1” may be assigned to the power saving specification, and the volume setting value for the output value may be “0”. However, the present embodiment in which the sound volume setting value for the adjacent output value is different is preferable because the boundary between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be easily distinguished by the change in the sound volume.

  The relationship between the output value and the volume setting value shown in FIG. 55 (b) is stored as a volume setting value table (not shown) in the ROM 272 of the effect control device 117, and is sent from the volume adjustment switch 227. This is referred to when the output value (the output value from the rotary switch 227b) is converted into a volume setting value.

  FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment (fifth embodiment). As shown in FIG. 56, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the block diagram of the first embodiment described above in that the rotary switch 227b of the volume adjustment switch 227 is connected to the input / output port of the effect control device 117. (See FIG. 7).

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. The RAM 273 of the fifth embodiment includes a rotary switch memory 273m, a volume setting value memory 273n, and a second power saving flag 273o in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment (273a to 273g; see FIG. 9). .

  The rotary switch memory 273m is a memory for storing an output value from the rotary switch 227b (an output value from the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m. Thereafter, in a volume setting process (see FIG. 60) described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227b changes.

  The volume setting value memory 273n is a value for storing a volume setting value corresponding to a value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m (that is, an output value from the rotary switch 227b). A sound is emitted from the speaker device 226 at a volume corresponding to the value stored in the volume setting value memory 273n (that is, the volume setting value set by operating the volume adjustment switch 227). When the power is turned on, the volume setting value memory 273n stores the volume setting value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time. Thereafter, in a volume setting process (see FIG. 60) described later, the stored content is updated each time the output value from the rotary switch 227b changes.

  The second power saving flag 273o is a flag that prescribes whether or not the specification is to save power during the customer waiting effect, that is, whether it is the power saving specification or the normal specification. When the second power saving flag 273o is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that power saving specifications are set, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”), Indicates that the normal specification is set. When the power is turned on, the second power saving flag 273o is set to a value corresponding to the output value from the rotary switch 227b at that time. That is, OFF is set when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 0 to 8, and ON is set when the output value from the rotary switch 227b is 9 to F. Thereafter, in a volume setting process (see FIG. 60) described later, each time the output value from the rotary switch 227b changes, the stored content is updated according to the output value.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, it will be described how the operation of main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed between the normal specification and the power saving specification in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a list of operations in the normal specification or the power saving specification for main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. As described above, since the normal specification and the power saving specification are specifications for power saving during the customer waiting effect, in FIG. 58, the electrical components that can be operated during the customer waiting effect, that is, the light emitting means for the effect (LEDs 301 to 301). 310, 321-323, 341-346), the light emitting means used for the notification purpose (that is, the notification LED 311), and the operations of the third symbol display device 81 are listed.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the normal specification is set, all the listed electrical components emit light with normal luminance. That is, when the normal specification is set, the light emitting means for notification and the notification LED 311 emit light with the normal luminance, and the third symbol display device 81 executes the customer waiting effect with the normal luminance.

  On the other hand, when the power saving specification is set, the third symbol display device 81 executes the customer waiting effect with the normal luminance, but all the light emitting means for the effect are turned off. As a result, it is possible to save power as compared with the normal specification by the amount of turning off the light emitting means for production. On the other hand, even if the power saving specification is set, the notification LED 311 remains at the normal luminance. Therefore, even if various errors occur in the pachinko machine 10 even during the waiting period, the error can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, so that the error can be quickly resolved. This makes it possible for the player to quickly return to the game, or to detect fraud early.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 59 to 63. In addition, each control process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. In the present embodiment, in the launch control process (S505) executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), when the launch control apparatus 112 is instructed to launch a ball, the effect control apparatus 117 is used. In addition, a firing command indicating that a firing instruction has been issued is output. Further, the startup process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 170 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing main processing of the fifth embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. The main process of the fifth embodiment is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 19) of the effect control device 117 is completed, and then repeatedly, like the main process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment described above. Executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in the main process of the fifth embodiment, the volume setting process (S5101) and the customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102) are executed after the effect mode setting process (S1102). This is different from the main processing of the first embodiment shown.

  Specifically, in the main process of the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a power consumption setting process and an effect mode setting process are executed (S1101, S11202). Next, a sound volume setting process (S5101) and a customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102) are executed, and thereafter the processes of S1103 to S1112 are executed. Of the processes of S1103 to S1112, the lamp output process (S1241) executed in the audio lamp effect process (S1104) includes the lamp output process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 25). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment described above.

  The volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process of the fifth embodiment sets the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226 in accordance with the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b). Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102) is a process of canceling the customer waiting effect associated with the operation of a button such as the effect button 53, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the volume setting process (S5101) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the volume setting process (S5101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the volume setting process (S5101), first, an output value from the rotary switch 227b (an output value from the volume adjustment switch 227) is acquired (S5201), and the acquired output value and a value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m. To determine whether or not the output value from the rotary switch 227b has changed (S5202). At this time, if there is no change in the output value, that is, if the output value acquired in S5201 is the same as the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m (S5202: No), the volume setting process is terminated, Return to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if the output value is changed as a result of the determination in the process of S5202, that is, if the output value acquired in S5201 is different from the value stored in the rotary switch memory 273m (S5202: Yes), The processing moves to S5203.

  In S5203, the output value acquired in S5201 is stored in the rotary switch memory 273m by overwriting (S5203). After the processing of S5203, the volume setting value corresponding to the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is stored in the volume setting value memory 273n. The volume setting value corresponding to the value of the rotary switch memory 273m (that is, the volume setting value stored in the volume setting value memory 273n) is referred to a volume setting value table (not shown) provided in the ROM 272. The volume setting value converted from the value of the rotary switch memory 273m.

  After the processing of S5204, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (that is, 9 to F in hexadecimal number) (S5205). At this time, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is 9 or more (S5205: Yes), since the power saving specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227, the second power saving flag 273o is set to ON (S5206). The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if the value of the rotary switch memory 273m is less than 9 (that is, 0 to 8) as a result of the determination in the process of S5205 (S5205: No), the normal specification is set by the volume adjustment switch 227. The second power saving flag 273o is set to OFF (S5207), the volume setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the above-described customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S5102) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect cancellation process (S5102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) of the fifth embodiment described above.

  In the customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S5102), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on (S5221). At this time, when the customer waiting effect flag 273e is off (S5221: No), since the customer waiting effect is not being executed, in this case, the customer waiting effect canceling process is terminated and the main process (FIG. 59) is performed. Return to Reference).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S5221, when the customer waiting effect flag 273e is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S5221: Yes), the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, It is determined whether various buttons provided on the pachinko machine 10 such as the power saving button 23 have been operated (S5222). At this time, if no button is operated (S5222: No), it is not the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect canceling process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  On the other hand, if any button is operated as a result of the determination in the process of S5222 (S5222: Yes), it is the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set to OFF ( S5223), the customer waiting effect cancellation process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 59).

  Next, the lamp output process (S1241) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing (S1241) of the fifth embodiment.

  In the lamp output process (S1241) of the present embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag is on (S5251). As a result of the determination by the processing of S5251, when the customer waiting effect flag is off, that is, when the customer waiting effect is not being executed (S5251: No), the processing of S1251 to S1258 is performed as in the first embodiment described above. Execute.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S5251 is that the customer waiting effect flag is on, that is, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S5251: Yes), whether or not the second power saving flag 273o is turned on. Is discriminated (S5252).

  If the result of determination in S5252 is that the second power saving flag 273o is on (S5252: Yes), the power saving specification is set, and thus the process proceeds to S1258, and the first to third LED control devices 291 are performed. To 293 are set to turn off (S1258), the lamp output process is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the light is turned off for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, so that the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341, which are light emitting means for production, 346 is turned off.

  On the other hand, if the second power saving flag 273o is off (S5252: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S5252, the normal specification is set, so the process proceeds to S1254, and the first to third LEDs Light emission with normal luminance is set for the control devices 291 to 293 (S1254). Therefore, when the power saving specification is set, the normal brightness is set for the first to third LED control devices 291 to 293, so that the LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 which are light emitting means for production are provided. ˜346 emits light with normal luminance.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the command reception interruption process of 5th Embodiment performed by MPU271 in the production | presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating command reception interrupt processing according to the fifth embodiment. Similarly to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment described above, the command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is also for receiving various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. This is an interrupt process that is executed every time various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 are received.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to output a firing command to the effect control device 117 when instructing the firing control device 112 to launch a ball, as shown in FIG. The command reception interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is different from the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment in that a process when a launch command is received is included.

  Specifically, when the production control device 117 receives a variation pattern command, a customer waiting production command, a start winning command, and an error command from the main control device 110, the command reception process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). ) (S1401 to S1404, S1406 to S1411).

  Also in the command receiving process of the fifth embodiment, when an error command is received (S1404: Yes), as in the first embodiment described above, the fourth LED control device 294 is responded to the received error command. The lighting pattern (that is, the lighting pattern according to the error content) and the light emission with the normal luminance are set (S1410, S1411). Therefore, when an error command is received during the customer waiting effect, the notification LED 311 can be turned on with normal luminance regardless of whether the specification is the normal specification or the power saving specification. As a result, various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be reliably reported to the player or the employee of the hall, and the error can be quickly resolved so that the player can return to the game quickly or illegally. It becomes possible to detect an action early.

  Here, when the production control device 117 receives a firing command from the main control device 110 (S5401: Yes), the customer waiting production flag 273e is set to off (S5402). Therefore, when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire a ball (that is, when a firing command is output from the main control device 110), the customer waiting effect flag 273e is set off. When the customer waiting effect is being executed, the execution of the customer waiting effect is cancelled.

  After the process of S5402, the process proceeds to S1405, and if another command is received (S1405: Yes) as in the first embodiment described above, the process according to the received command is executed ( S1411), the command reception interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S5401, also when the effect control apparatus 117 has not received the firing command from the main control apparatus 110 (S5401: No), the process proceeds to S1405.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the 16 output values from the volume adjustment switch 227 are each set to a plurality of output values (more specifically, the normal specification and the power saving specification). 9 output values from 0 to 8 for the normal specification, and 7 output values from 9 to F for the power saving specification) are assigned to the power saving specification. Individual volume setting values (more specifically, seven volume setting values from 1 to 7) can be set by operating the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, even in the power saving specification, a desired volume can be set from among seven levels by operating the volume adjustment switch 227. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a suitable game with a sound volume suitable for the situation while saving power. Further, not only the power saving during the customer waiting effect according to the power saving specification but also the power saving during the game by adjusting the volume (that is, the power saving by reducing the volume) can be achieved.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third and fourth embodiments described above, power is saved by turning off the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) in the power saving mode. However, in the sixth embodiment, the third symbol is displayed. The backlight of the display device 81 (LCD) is turned off and power supply to the image controller 236 is cut off (power is turned off) to save power. Note that in the sixth embodiment, identical symbols are assigned to components identical to those in the first through fifth embodiments described above and descriptions thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG.64 and FIG.65, the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 of 6th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 64 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment is replaced with the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments described above, and an audio lamp control device 113 and a display control device 114. And have.

  The sound lamp control device 113 performs sound output in the speaker device 226, lighting and extinguishing of various LEDs 301 to 311, 321 to 323 and 341 to 348, lighting and extinguishing of the power saving symbol display device 181 and display control device 114. The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled. The display control device 114 controls the change display (dynamic display) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the power supply unit 251 of the power supply device 115 operates necessary for each of the control devices 110 to 114, 291 to 297, the speaker device 226, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). Supply voltage.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned above and the display control apparatus 114 is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the audio lamp control device 113 includes an MPU 221, an input / output port 225, a bus line 224, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, and a movable body drive device 297. Yes.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 includes a main control device 110, a display control device 114, first to sixth LED control devices 291 to 296, a movable body driving device 297, a mode change button 22, a power saving button 23, and an effect. A button 53 and a speaker device 226 are connected. Further, a power-saving symbol display device 181 and an operation device 182 are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The operation member 182 is a device for moving the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R), and the rotational motion of a motor capable of positioning control, such as a servo motor or a stepping motor, and the rotor of the motor is changed to a linear motion. It has a rack and pinion mechanism for conversion. The left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are moved in the left-right direction by converting the rotational motion of the motor of the operating device 182 into a linear motion by the rack and pinion mechanism.

  The MPU 221 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 221 incorporates various circuits such as a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have.

  The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The work RAM 233 has a variation counter (not shown). This variation time counter (not shown) is a counter that measures the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) after the variation effect is started when the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation time counter is a display effect process (see FIG. 79) executed every 20 milliseconds, and an initial value corresponding to the variation time extracted from the display variation pattern command immediately before the variation effect is started. It is set (see S6606 in FIG. 79) and updated by subtracting one each time the display effect process is executed while the changing effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (see S6610 in FIG. 79). ). That is, the fluctuation time counter is counted with 20 milliseconds as one count. In the display effect process, the change effect data and the continuous notice effect data corresponding to the value of the change time counter are read from the video RAM 234 described later, and an image corresponding to the effect data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the work RAM 233 includes, as flags (not shown), an effect permission flag (not shown) indicating whether or not the effect is permitted, a change start flag (not shown) indicating whether or not the change display should be started, and the like. Have. An effect permission flag (not shown) is turned on when an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the audio lamp control device 113 (see S6411 in FIG. 77). Turned off by generation (not shown). The variation start flag (not shown) is turned on when a variation pattern command for display instructing a variation effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 or a mode of continuous notice effect is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 77). The display is turned off when the variable display is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see S6604 of FIG. 79).

  The image controller 236 is a video display processor (VDP) similar to the image controller 274 (see FIG. 7), and adjusts the timing of the character ROM 235, video RAM 234, and output port 238 based on internal commands received from the MPU 231. In addition to intervening in reading and writing data, the data stored in the video RAM 234 is read at a predetermined timing to generate a variable display image in units of frames and display it on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory in which data for effects such as symbols (third symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in a compressed form. The character ROM 235 stores the same data as the character ROM 275 (see FIG. 7) in the same format. Only the necessary data for presentation that is compressed and stored in the character ROM 235 is read and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 236.

  Similar to the video RAM 276 (see FIG. 7), the video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state. The video RAM 234 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). This variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (variable effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the variable display data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 236 according to time to generate a variable display image in units of frames.

  FIG. 66A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66A, the RAM 223 includes an effect mode counter 223b, a power saving flag 223h, a transition flag 223j, a closing start flag 223k, and a return waiting flag 223p.

  The effect mode counter 223b is a counter for setting the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among the three types of effect modes (the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect mode). The effect mode counter 223b is initialized when the power is turned on and set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 223b of the present embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and a mode change button at an effective or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect). Each time 22 is operated, 1 is added. After reaching the value set as the maximum value (“2” in the present embodiment), the effect mode counter 223b is returned to zero.

  The power saving flag 223h is a flag indicating which of the two power consumption modes (the normal power consumption mode and the power saving mode) is set. When the power saving flag 223h is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and when the power saving mode is set to off (that is, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, the normal power consumption mode is set. After the power saving flag 223h is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, the power saving flag 223h is alternately switched on and off every time the player operates the power saving button 23.

  The in-transition flag 223j is a flag indicating whether the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is transitioning from the open state to the closed state or from the closed state to the open state. When the transition flag 223j is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the state of the shutter member 180 is transitioning. On the other hand, when the in-transition flag 223j is set to off (that is, “0”), the state of the shutter member 180 is not in transition, that is, the state of the shutter member 180 is a completely closed state or a complete state. Indicates that it is stopped in the open state. The in-transition flag 223j is set to ON when the shutter member 180 starts to be closed or opened due to the player operating the power saving button 23, and then the state of the shutter member 180 is completely closed or completely closed. When in an open state, it is set to off. The in-migration flag 223j is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The closing start flag 223k is a flag indicating that the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) in the open state has started closing. When the closing start flag 223k is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the shutter member 180 in the opened state has started closing. The closing start flag 223k is set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the player operates the power saving button 23 in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223h is OFF). Then it is set to on. Thereafter, when closing of the shutter 180 is started, the shutter 180 is set to off.

  The return standby flag 223p is a flag indicating that the 3rd symbol display device 81 is waiting for return when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. When the return waiting flag 223p is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return. The return waiting flag 223p is set to off (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the player operates the power saving button 23 in the power saving mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223h is on). Set to on. Thereafter, when a return waiting time (in this embodiment, 25 seconds) that is a predetermined wait time has elapsed, the return waiting flag 223p is set to OFF. Alternatively, in the normal consumption mode (that is, when the power saving flag 223h is off), when the player operates the power saving button 23, the return waiting flag 223p is set to off.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, during the period when the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, until the return standby time elapses). The power saving symbol display device 181 is configured not to be turned off. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off in the power saving mode, it is possible to favorably save power. However, since the power supply of the VDP is turned off, it takes time to start (return) the VDP even if the power supply mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode and the power supply to the VDP is turned on again. For this reason, there is a problem that the image cannot be normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is reapplied to the VDP and until the VDP is activated and restored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for such a problem, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is kept on for the return standby time, and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off. The display by the power-saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, so that the player can change the symbol display, stop symbols, etc. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming invisible.

  FIG. 66B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), the work RAM 233 includes an effect mode counter 233b, a customer waiting effect flag 233e, and a changing mode change flag 233g.

  The effect mode counter 233b is a counter for setting the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 among the three types of effect modes (the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect mode). The effect mode counter 233b is initialized when the power is turned on and set to zero (zero clear). The effect mode counter 233b of the present embodiment is configured to take a range of 0 to 2, and the effect mode command (command indicating the effect mode selected or instructed by the mode change button 22 from the sound lamp control device 113). ) Is received, the value of the effect mode command is set.

  The customer waiting effect flag 233e is a flag indicating whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for a customer effect. When the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed. When the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off (that is, “0”), Indicates that no waiting performance has been performed.

  In the customer waiting effect flag 233e, after the display control device 114 receives a customer waiting effect command from the sound lamp control device 113, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to a customer waiting effect image (customer waiting effect). And set to on. Then, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF when the display control device 114 receives a customer waiting effect release command from the audio lamp control device 113, or when the variable display is started. Note that the voice lamp control device 113 displays the customer waiting effect cancellation command when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect or when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated. Output to. That is, when a ball is fired during a customer waiting effect, when various buttons such as the effect button 53 are operated, or when a variable display is started, the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF. The The customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on.

  The changing mode change flag 233g is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during high-speed changing. When the changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON (that is, “1”), it is confirmed that the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the mode change button 22 during the high speed change. Show. The changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON when the mode change button 22 is operated during high speed change after being set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on. Is turned off when is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, how the operation of main electrical components provided in the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the power consumption mode includes two modes: a normal consumption mode and a power saving mode in which the power consumption by the electrical components is smaller than that in the normal consumption mode.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a list of operations of main electrical components according to the power consumption mode in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the electrical components listed in FIG. 67 are the same except that the power supply of the image controller 236 (VDP) is turned off in the power saving mode when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode. The operation is the same as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 41).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 to FIG. 79, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. In addition, each control process performed by MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is as the flowchart shown in FIGS. 11-18 mentioned above. However, in this embodiment, in the launch control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), when the launch control apparatus 112 is instructed to launch a ball, the sound lamp control apparatus It is assumed that a firing command indicating that a firing instruction has been issued is output to 113.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 76, each process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer allocation that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). Included.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, an initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S6001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S6122 is performed in this startup processing due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 69). ) Is determined during execution (S6002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 69, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S6118 in FIG. 69), it executes a power-off process in S6122. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S6122 is in the middle of execution can be determined from the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S6002: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S6122 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S6006 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S6003: Yes), the process proceeds to S6004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6007.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S6004.

  On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S6122, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S6003: No), and the process proceeds to S6007.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S6002: Yes), the current start-up process is after the instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S6122, the sound lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S6004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S6004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S6004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S6005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S6006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S6005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S6011), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the notification LED 311. Note that the speaker device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the process of S6007, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S6007). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S6122 (see S6121 in FIG. 69). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S6122 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S6007. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S6122 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S6007: Yes), the RAM work area (work area) is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S6008), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6010). ).

  On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S6007 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the current startup processing is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the processing of S6007 is performed via the processing of S6004 to S6006. Or when the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S6007: No), S6008, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S6009, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S6009).

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S2008 is that when the process from S6004 to S6006 is reached via the process of S6006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S6004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 by the process of S6009, the interrupt permission is set (S6010), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. This main process is a process that is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 68) of the sound lamp control device 113 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main process, first, a power consumption mode setting process for setting a power consumption mode in accordance with the operation of the power saving button 23 is executed (S6101). Details of the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), the effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode based on the operation of the mode change button 22 is executed (S6102). Details of the effect mode setting process (S6102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the effect mode setting process (S6102), a customer waiting effect canceling process for canceling the customer waiting effect accompanying the operation of a button such as the effect button 53 is executed (S6103). The details of the customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S6103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S6103), it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (that is, since the processing of S6104 was executed last time) (S6104), When 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S6104: Yes), a lamp output process (S6105) is executed. In this lamp output process (S6105), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13 and the like so as to become a lighting pattern edited in the process of S6109 described later. To 323, 341 to 346). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the lamp output process (S6105) of this embodiment, the process similar to the lamp output process (refer FIG. 47) of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above is performed.

  After the lamp output process (S6105) is executed, a power-on notification process is executed (S6106). The power-on notification process (S6106) is a notification for notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. This is performed by light emitting means such as the LED 311. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 so that it may alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S6107 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In S6107, effect button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S6107). This production button input monitoring / production process (S6107) is similar to the above-described production button input monitoring / production process (S1242; see FIG. 42, FIG. 37). This is a process of monitoring input of whether or not an operation has been performed and setting to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the effect button 53.

  After performing the effect button input monitoring / effect process (S6107), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108). If the result of determination in S6108 is that the power saving flag 223h is off, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6108: No), lamp editing processing is executed (S6109). The processing moves to S6110. In the lamp editing process (S 6109), various LEDs (LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 321) provided on the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13, and the like so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. 323, 341 to 346) are set.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S6108 is that the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and the LEDs 301 to 310, which are the light emitting means to be controlled, Since 321 to 323 and 341 to 346 are turned off, it is not necessary to set a lighting pattern for these light emitting means. Therefore, in such a case, the lamp editing process (S6109) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6110. In the present embodiment, the lamp editing process (S6109) is not executed when the power saving flag 223h is on (S6108: Yes), but the lamp editing process (S6109) may be executed.

  In S6110, sound editing / output processing is executed (S6110). In the sound editing / output process (S6110), the output pattern of the speaker device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the speaker device 226 according to the setting.

  After executing the sound editing / output process (S6110), the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S6111). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S6111), based on the variation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111), the lamp editing process in S6109, the sound editing / output process in S6110, and the like are executed.

  After the execution of the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S6111), the effect movable body control process for controlling the operation of the effect movable body 631 is executed (S6112). In this effect movable body control process (S6112), an operation pattern of the effect movable body 631 corresponding to each effect is set so as to correspond to each effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the movable object driving device. By outputting to 297, the effect movable body 631 is operated in the set operation pattern.

  After execution of the effect movable body control process (S6112), a power saving symbol display control process, which is a process for controlling the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6113). Details of the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the power saving symbol display control process (S6113), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114). At this time, if the power saving flag 223h is on (S6114: Yes), the device used as the display device for the stop symbol (the result of the big hit lottery) is changed to the third mode in accordance with the switching from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. A power saving mode transition process that is a process of switching from the symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6115). Details of the power saving mode transition process (S6115) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 223h is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6114 (S6114: No), the power saving mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode when the device used as the display device for the stop symbol is switched. A power saving mode canceling process, which is a process of switching from the design symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81, is executed (S6120). Details of the power saving mode canceling process (S6120) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the power saving mode transition process (S6115) or the power saving mode release process (S6120), a decorative symbol variation display process is executed (S6116). In the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command (display variation pattern command for display) that sets the effect mode of variation display (variation effect) in the third symbol display device 81 and instructs the display control device 114 of the set mode. , A display stop symbol command).

  After execution of the decorative symbol variation display process (S6116), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S6117). Details of this command determination processing (S6117) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the command determination process (S6117), it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 223 (S6118). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. If power off occurrence information is stored in the process of S6118 (S6118: Yes), both the power off flag and the power off process flag are turned on (S6121), and the power off process is executed (S6122). After executing the power-off process (S6122), the power-off process flag is turned off (S6123), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process (S6122), the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off, and the speaker device 226, various light emitting means (LEDs 301 to 310, 321-323, 341 to 348), and the first The output of the 3 symbol display device 81 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6118, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S6118: No), the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 223 by the process of S6006 of the startup process (see FIG. 68) is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S6119). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S6119: No), the process returns to S6101, and the above-described processes of S6101 to S6119 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM 223 is destroyed by the process of S6119 (S6119: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is in an infinite loop, the display effect process (S6505; see FIG. 78) is not executed, and thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Thereby, the player can know that abnormality has occurred. When it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, various LEDs (for example, the first inner peripheral LED 301) provided on the speaker device 226, the front frame 14, the lower dish unit 15, the game board 13, etc. The RAM destruction may be notified on the screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Next, the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) of the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the power consumption mode setting process (S6101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), first, it is confirmed whether or not the power saving button 23 has been operated (S6201). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is not operated (S6201: No), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the power saving button 23 is operated as a result of the confirmation in the process of S6201 (S6201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the transition flag 223j is on (S6202). At this time, if the transition flag 223j is on (S6202: Yes), the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is transitioning from the open state to the closed state, or from the closed state to the open state. Then, the power consumption mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). Thus, in this embodiment, when the state of the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is in transition, that is, when the shutter member 180 is operating, the operation of the power saving button 23 is invalidated. ing.

  On the other hand, if the in-migration flag 223j is turned off as a result of the determination in the process of S6202 (S6202: No), the in-migration flag 223j is set on (S6203). Next, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6204).

  If the result of determination in S6204 is that the power saving flag 223h is off (S6204: No), the power saving flag 223h is set on (S6205), and the closing start flag 223k is set on (S6206). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to OFF (S6207), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 223h is on as a result of the determination in the process of S6204 (S2201: Yes), the power saving flag 223h is set to off (S6208). Next, the return waiting flag 223p is set to ON (S6209), and the time for the return waiting time is started (S6210).

  Next, a lighting restart command is output to the display control device 114 (S6211), the power consumption mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When receiving the lighting restart command, the display control device 114 turns on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 and turns on the power of the image controller 236 which is VDP (turns on the power again).

  Thus, according to the power consumption mode setting process (S6101), when the power saving mode is switched to the normal power consumption mode, the process of S6209 is executed and the return standby flag 223p is set to ON. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, the return standby flag 223p set to ON in S6209 is maintained in the ON state until the return standby time elapses, and during that period, the power-saving symbol display is performed. The display by the device 181 is continued. In the present embodiment, the return waiting time is set as a time (for example, 25 seconds) sufficient for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal after the power is reapplied to the VDP (image controller 236). Has been. Therefore, in accordance with the switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the player can wait until the display on the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal after the lighting control command is issued in S6211. However, it is possible to prevent a display such as a symbol variation display or a stop symbol from being visually recognized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the effect mode setting process (S6102) of the sixth embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an effect mode setting process (S6102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the production mode setting process (S6102), first, it is confirmed whether or not the mode change button 22 has been operated (S6221). If the mode change button 22 has not been operated (S6221: No), the production mode setting process is terminated. Returning to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the mode change button 22 is operated as a result of the confirmation in the process of S6221 (S6221: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is changing (S6222). At this time, if it is changing (S6222: Yes), it is determined whether it is changing at high speed (S6223).

  If the result of determination in S6223 is that the speed is changing (S6223: No), even if it is changing, it is not the time when the mode change button 22 can change the effect mode. The mode setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6223 is that the high-speed change is in progress (S6223: Yes), it is time when the effect mode can be changed by the mode change button 22 during the change. The change command is output to the display controller 114 (S6224). When receiving the changing mode change command, the display control device 114 sets the changing mode change flag 233g to ON (see FIG. 77).

  After the process of S6224, 1 is added to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (S6225). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode counter 223b exceeds 2 (S6226). If the value of the effect mode counter 223b exceeds 2 as a result of the determination in S6226 (S6226: Yes), the effect mode counter 223b is cleared to zero (S6227), and the process proceeds to S6228. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the effect mode counter 223b is 2 or less as a result of the determination by the process of S6226, the process of S6227 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6228.

  In S6228, an effect mode command corresponding to the value of the effect mode counter 223b (that is, indicating the value) is output to the display control device 114 (S6228). After the process of S6228, the effect mode setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When receiving the effect mode command, the display control device 114 sets the effect mode counter 233b based on the effect mode command (see FIG. 77).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6222 is not changing (S6222: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6229). At this time, if it is not during the customer waiting effect (S6229: No), it is the time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited. In such a case, the effect mode setting process is terminated and the main process (see FIG. 69). Return to.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6226 is that the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6226: Yes), the effect mode can be changed (permitted), and in this case, the process is performed in S6225. Migrate to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the above-described customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S6103) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S6103) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the customer waiting effect cancellation processing (S6103), it is first determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6241). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not in progress (S6241: No), the customer waiting effect canceling process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6241 is that the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6241: Yes), the effect button 53, the mode change button 22, the power saving button 23, and the like are provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether or not various buttons have been operated (S6242). At this time, if no button is operated (S6242: No), it is not the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect canceling process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if any button is operated as a result of the determination by the processing of S6242 (S6242: Yes), it is the timing to cancel the customer waiting effect, so the customer waiting effect cancellation command is output to the display control device 114. (S6243). After the process of S6243, the customer waiting effect cancellation process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). When receiving the customer waiting effect cancellation command, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  Next, the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a power-saving symbol display control process (S6113) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S6113), first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6261). At this time, when the power saving flag 223h is on, that is, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode (S6261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S6262). As a result of the determination in the process of S6262, if it is not a big hit (S6262: No), it is determined whether or not it is changing (during symbol change display) (S6263). At this time, if not changing (S6263: No), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing (change start timing) of the change display by the third symbol display device 81 (S6264).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S6264, if it is the fluctuation start timing (S6264: Yes), the process proceeds to S6265. Also, if the result of determination in S6263 is that there is a change (S3403: Yes), the process proceeds to S6265.

  In S6265, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol stop timing (S6265). At this time, if it is not the symbol stop timing (S6265: No), since it is within the symbol variation time, variation display by the power-saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6266). That is, the segment pattern of each of the seven segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 is varied. After the processing of S6266, the power saving symbol display control device is terminated and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6265, when it is the symbol stop timing (S6265: Yes), the stop symbol set based on the type command received from the main controller 110 is used as the symbol display device for power saving 181. (181a to 181c) are displayed (S6273). In the present embodiment, the stop symbol display mode is extracted from the type command received from the main controller 110 (S6351; see FIG. 76), and the decorative symbol effect setting process (S6116; based on the extracted stop symbol display mode). 69). After the process of S6273, the power saving symbol display control device is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6264, if it is not the change start timing (S6264: No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not in progress (S6272: No), the power-saving symbol display control device is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). In such a case, the stop symbol being displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6272, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272: Yes), there is no need to perform the display by the power saving symbol display device 181. In such a case, the power saving symbol display device 181 is used. Is turned off (S6270), the power-saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). In the present embodiment, as a result of the determination in the process of S6272, if the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is maintained as it is. When the customer waiting effect is not being performed (S6272: No), the processing may be shifted to S6270 (that is, the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off).

  If the result of the determination in S6262 is a big hit (S6262: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S6271). In the power saving mode, when a big hit occurs, the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 blinks by the processing of S6271, so that the player recognizes that the big hit is by visually checking this blinking. It is possible to reliably recognize, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the suppression of the operation (light emission or operation) of the electrical component. After the process of S6271, the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 223h is turned off as a result of the determination in the process of S6261, that is, if the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode (S6261: No), the return standby flag 223p is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (S6267).

  If the return standby flag 223p is on as a result of the determination in the process of S6267 (S6267: Yes), the return standby time (25 seconds in this embodiment) is set after the return standby flag 223p is set on. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S6268). At this time, if the return waiting time has not yet elapsed (S6268: No), the process proceeds to S6262. That is, the power-saving symbol display device during the period from when the return standby flag 223p is set to ON (that is, after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode) until the return standby time elapses. The display by 181 is continued.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6267, when the return standby time has elapsed (S6267: Yes), the return standby flag 223p is set to off (S6269), and the power saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S6270). ). After the process of S6270, the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  If the return standby flag 223p is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6267 (S6267: No), after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, the power saving symbol display device 181 Since the period for continuing the display (that is, the return waiting time) has already elapsed, the process proceeds to S6270.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the power saving mode transition process (S6115) described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode transition process (S6115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode transition process (S6115), first, it is determined whether or not the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301). At this time, if the closing start flag 223k is on (S6301: Yes), it is the timing to start closing the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) based on the player operating the power saving button 23. In such a case, first, the closing start flag 223k is set to OFF (S6302).

  After the processing of S6302, a display area reduction command is output to the display control device 114 (S6303). The display area reduction command is a command for instructing the start of reduction of the display area 81a (see FIG. 43) of the third symbol display device 81. When the display control apparatus 114 receives this display area reduction command, the display area reduction command is displayed. An image to be displayed on the three-pattern display device 81 is formed to be reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the reduced image is displayed in the display area 81a.

  Next, the closing of the shutter member 180 is set (S6304), and the process proceeds to S6305. When the process of S6304 is executed, the motor of the operating device 182 is controlled to move in the direction in which the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are closed. At this time, the operating device 182 sets the moving speed of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R (the speed at which the shutter member 180 is closed) to the reduction speed of the display area 81a based on the display area reduction command output by the process of S6303. Control the motor to fit. As a result, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the shutter member 180 is closed in accordance with the reduction speed. As the display area 81a is reduced, the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as a region that is lit in a predetermined color.

  On the other hand, if the closing start flag 223k is off as a result of the determination in the process of S6301 (S6301: No), the process of S6302 to S6304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6305.

  In S6305, it is determined whether or not the migration flag 223j is on (S6305). At this time, when the transition flag 223j is off (S6305: No), the state of the shutter member 180 is stopped in a completely closed state or a completely opened state. The migration process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6305, when the transition flag 223j is on (S6305: Yes), it is determined whether or not the shutter member 180 that is transitioning to the closed state has reached a predetermined position ( S6306). At this time, if the shutter member 180 has not reached the predetermined position (S6306: No), in order to continue the reduction of the display area 81a and the closing of the shutter member 180, the power saving mode transition process is terminated and the main process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 69).

  If the result of determination in S6306 is that the shutter member 180 has reached the predetermined position (S6306: Yes), it is determined whether or not the shutter member 180 is stopped at the predetermined position (S6307).

  If the result of determination in S6307 is that it is not stopped (S6307: No), closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped (S6308), and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, if it is stopped (S6307: Yes), the process of S6308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6309.

  In S6309, it is determined whether or not it is changing (during symbol change display) (S6309). At this time, if not changing (S6309: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol change display has been started (S6310). At this time, if the symbol display is not started (S6310: No), the shutter member 180 is closed (or the display area 81a is reduced) by the process of S6308, and then a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). ) Is determined (S6311).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S6311, after the closing of the shutter member 180 is stopped, the symbol fluctuation display is not executed (that is, S6309: No and S6310: No), and the predetermined time has not elapsed. (S6311: No), the power saving mode transition process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6311, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of the shutter member 180 was stopped (S6311: Yes), the shutter member 180 is completely closed (S6312), and the turn-off command Is output to the display control device 114 (S6313). When receiving the turn-off command, the display control device 114 turns off the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 and turns off the power of the image controller 236 that is a VDP (cuts off the power). After the process of S6313, the transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6314), the power saving mode transition process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S6309 is that there is a change (S6309: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the symbol stop timing (S6315). Also, as a result of the determination in the process of S6310, when the symbol variation display is started (S6310: Yes), the process proceeds to S6315.

  If the result of determination in S6315 is the symbol stop timing (S6315: Yes), the process proceeds to S6312. In this case, after the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is maintained for a predetermined fixed display time (for example, 0.5 seconds), the process of S6312 (complete shutter closing) is executed. On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6315, if it is not the symbol stop timing (S6315: No), the power saving mode transition process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the power saving mode release process (S6120) described above will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the power saving mode canceling process (S6120) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the power saving mode canceling process (S6120), it is first determined whether or not the transition flag 223j is on (S6321). At this time, when the transition flag 223j is off (S6321: No), the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is stopped in the fully opened state. The release process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S6321 is that the in-transition flag 223j is on (S6321: Yes), it is determined whether the return waiting flag 223p is on (S). At this time, when the return standby flag 223p is on (S6322: Yes), a period of waiting for the normal return of the third symbol display device 81 after the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Since it is in the middle (that is, during the period until the return waiting time elapses), in such a case, the power saving mode release process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  If the return standby flag 223p is OFF as a result of the determination in the process of S6322 (S6322: No), the lighting restart command is output because the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode (that is, FIG. 70 (S6211 is executed), the return waiting time has elapsed, and the third symbol display device 81 has returned to normal. Therefore, in such a case, the shutter member 180 is completely opened (S6323), the transition flag 223j is set to OFF (S6324), the power saving mode canceling process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 69). Return. Therefore, according to the power saving mode release processing, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode due to the player operating the power saving button 23, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. After returning to normal, the shutter member 180 is completely opened.

  Next, the command determination process (S6117) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S6117) executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this command determination process (S6117), first, a first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command is received from the device 110 (S6341). At this time, if a variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S6341: No), the process proceeds to S6342.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of determination in the process of S6341 (S6341: Yes), a variation pattern command reception flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON. (S6349). A variation pattern command reception flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, and is turned on when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (that is, “1”). When the display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command is set, it is set to off (that is, “0”).

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S6350). The process proceeds to S6342. The variation time extracted by the process of S6350 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is turned on by the processing of S6349, in the decorative symbol variation setting processing (S6116; see FIG. 69), the variation display according to the variation time extracted from the variation pattern command by the processing of S6350 ( The effect mode of the change effect is set, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the set effect mode of the change display is output to the display control device 114.

  In S6342, it is determined whether a type command has been received from main controller 110 (S6342). At this time, when the type command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6342: No), the process proceeds to S6343.

  On the other hand, if the type command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination by the process of S6342 (S6342: Yes), the display form of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command (S6351), and the process proceeds to S6343. To do. The display pattern of the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6351 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 223. Then, in the decorative symbol variation setting process (S6116; see FIG. 69), a stop symbol is set based on the stop mode of the stop symbol extracted from the type command, and a display stop symbol command corresponding to the set stop symbol is displayed. It is output to the control device 114.

  In S6343, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S6343). At this time, if a stop command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S6343: No), the process proceeds to S6344.

  On the other hand, if a stop command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S6343 (S6343: Yes), the stop command is output to the display controller 114 (S6352), and the process proceeds to S6344. .

  In S 6344, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect command is received from main controller 110 (S 6344). At this time, when the customer waiting effect command is not received from the main control device 110 (S6344: No), the process proceeds to S6345.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6344, when a customer waiting effect command is received from the main control device 110 (S6344: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is output to the display control device 114 (S6353), Transition to processing.

  In S6345, it is determined whether or not a start winning command is received from the main controller 110 (S6345). At this time, when the start winning command is not received from the main control device 110 (S6345: No), the process proceeds to S6346.

  On the other hand, if the start winning command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6345 (S6345: Yes), the starter LED lighting control process for controlling the lighting of the starter LED 347 is executed (S6354), and the process of S6346 is performed. Migrate to In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the starting port LED lighting control process (S6354) of this embodiment, the process similar to the starting port LED lighting control process (refer FIG. 40) of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above is performed.

  In the process of S6346, it is determined whether an error command has been received from main controller 110 (S6346). If the error command is not received as a result of the determination in the process of S6346 (S6346: No), the process proceeds to S6347.

  On the other hand, if an error command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6346 (S6346: Yes), the lighting pattern corresponding to the received error command (that is, according to the error content) is sent to the fourth LED control device 294. (Lighting pattern) and normal light emission are set (S6355, S6356), and the process proceeds to S6347.

  In the process of S6347, it is determined whether or not a launch command has been received from the main controller 110 (S6347). At this time, if a firing command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S6347: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6347, when a launch command is received (S6347: Yes), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (S6357). At this time, if it is not during the customer waiting effect (S6357: No), the process proceeds to S6348.

  If the result of the determination in S6357 is that a customer waiting effect is in progress (S6357: Yes), a customer waiting effect cancellation command is output to the display control device 114 (S6358), and the process proceeds to S6348. Upon receiving the customer waiting effect cancellation command output by the process of S6358, the display control device 114 sets the customer waiting effect flag 233e to off (see FIG. 77).

  In the process of S6348, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6348). At this time, if no other command has been received (S6348: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6348 (S6348: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6359), the command determination process is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 69). In addition, as processing according to other commands (S6359), for example, when a hold number command is received from the main control device 110, the hold command is output to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power-on and external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. This external interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the external interrupt process is executed with the reception of the command from the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined whether or not the received command is an effect permission command (S6401). At this time, if the received command is not an effect permission command (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6402.

  On the other hand, if the received command is an effect permission command as a result of the determination in the process of S6401 (S6401: Yes), an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S6401). ), The process proceeds to S6402. An effect permission flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the initial setting of the main control device 110 has been performed, and an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is sent to the sound lamp control device. It is set to ON (ie, “1”) when received via 113, and is set to OFF (ie, “0”) when a power interruption occurs.

  In the process of S6402, it is determined whether the received command is a display variation pattern command (S6402). At this time, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S6402: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a display variation pattern command as a result of the determination in the process of S6402 (S6402: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON ( S6412). A fluctuation start flag (not shown) is a flag (not shown) indicating whether or not fluctuation display should be started, and is turned on when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (that is, “1”). ) And when the variable display is started on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is set to OFF (that is, “0”).

  Next, the variation mode indicated by the variation pattern command for display is extracted (S6413), and the process proceeds to S6403. With the reception of the display variation pattern command, variation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation display is performed in the variation mode extracted by the process of S6413.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether the received command is a display stop symbol command (S6403). At this time, if the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S6403: No), the process proceeds to S6404.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a display stop symbol command as a result of the determination in the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is extracted (S6414), and the process proceeds to S6404. To do. The variable display executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped at the stop symbol extracted by the process of S6414.

  In the process of S6404, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect command (S6404). At this time, if the received command is not a customer waiting effect command (S6404: No), the process proceeds to S6405.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a customer waiting effect command (S6404: Yes) as a result of determination in the process of S6404, a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is set to ON (S6415), and the process of S6405. Migrate to A customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, and is turned on when a customer waiting effect command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 (ie, “1”). When the customer waiting effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, it is set to off (ie, “0”).

  In the process of S6405, it is determined whether the received command is a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405). At this time, if the received command is not a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405: No), the process proceeds to S6406.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a customer waiting effect cancellation command as a result of the determination in the process of S6405 (S6405: Yes), the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to off (S6416), and the process proceeds to S6406. .

  In the process of S6406, it is determined whether the received command is a turn-off command (S6406). At this time, if the received command is not a turn-off command (S6406: No), the process proceeds to S6407.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a turn-off command as a result of the determination by the processing of S6406 (S6406: Yes), the power of the image controller 236 that is VDP is turned off (S6417), and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 (Not shown) is turned off (S6418), and the process proceeds to S6407. As described above, the turn-off command is a command output from the sound lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the image controller 236 is turned off and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the display by the power saving symbol display device 181 having lower power consumption than the third symbol display device 81 is started. Therefore, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving) while allowing the player to confirm the visual recognition of the stop symbol.

  In the process of S6407, it is determined whether the received command is a lighting restart command (S6407). At this time, if the received command is not a lighting restart command (S6407: No), the process proceeds to S6408.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a lighting restart command (S6407: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6407, the image controller 236 that is a VDP is turned on (S6419), and the back of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. A light (not shown) is turned on (S6420), and the process proceeds to S6408. As described above, the lighting restart command is a command output from the sound lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, the power of the image controller 236 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on again), and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. By re-lighting, the display by the third symbol display device 81 is restored.

  In the process of S6408, it is determined whether the received command is a changing mode command (S6408). At this time, if the received command is not a changing mode command (S6408: No), the process proceeds to S6409. On the other hand, if the received command is the changing mode command (S6408: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S6408, the changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON (S6421), and the process proceeds to S6409.

  In the process of S6409, it is determined whether the received command is an effect mode command (S6409). At this time, if the received command is not an effect mode command (S6409: No), the process proceeds to S6410.

  On the other hand, if the received command is an effect mode command as a result of the determination in the process of S6409 (S6409: Yes), the effect mode indicated by the received effect mode command (the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect) A value corresponding to (mode) is set in the effect mode counter 233b (S6422), and the process proceeds to S6410.

  In the process of S6410, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6410). At this time, if no other command is received (S6410: No), the external interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6410 (S6410: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6423), and the external interrupt process is terminated. As another process (S6423) according to the command, for example, when a hold number command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command is displayed in the third symbol display. When the special figure reservation number display unit 87 (display units 87a to 87d) displayed on the device 81 is displayed or when the display area reduction command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display is performed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, an image to be reduced is formed to be reduced at a predetermined reduction speed, and the reduced image is displayed in the display area 81a.

  Next, a main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  The main process shown in FIG. 78 is a process that is started when the power is turned on. When the main process is started, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S6501). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed.

  After executing the initial setting process (S6501), in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 235 and the video RAM 234 is displayed. (S6502). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6503).

  Next, it is confirmed whether an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is turned on (S6504). As a result of the confirmation in the process of S6504, if the production permission flag is OFF (S6504: No), the production permission command has not yet been received from the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, from the audio lamp control device 113, Until the production permission command is received, that is, until the production permission flag is turned on, the processing after S6505 is awaited.

  As a result of checking in the process of S6504, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S6504: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the changing effect and a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect are displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD). ) A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on 81, is executed (S6505). Details of the display effect process (S6505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the display effect process (S6505), in order to execute the display effect process (S6505) every 20 milliseconds (20 ms), whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the display effect process (S6505) was executed. Is confirmed (S6506).

  As a result of checking in the process of S6506, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed (S6506: No), the process waits until 20 ms or more has elapsed, while if 20 ms or more has elapsed (S6506: Yes). Then, display effect processing (S6505) is executed. Thus, the display effect process (S6505) is repeatedly executed every 20 ms until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, the display effect process (S6505) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S6505) executed in the main process (see FIG. 78) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S6505), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether it is a jackpot) (S6601). If it is medium (S6601: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S6609). In this jackpot effect process, effect data corresponding to the jackpot effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276 to update the image of the jackpot effect. After the big hit effect process (S6609) ends, the display effect process (S6505) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the process of S6601 (S6601: No), it is determined whether or not the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executing the variation display of the 3rd symbol (that is, whether or not it is changing). (S6602). At this time, if not changing (S6602: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is ON (S6603).

  If the variation start flag is turned on as a result of the determination in S6603 (S6603: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S6604), and the customer waiting effect flag 233e is turned off (S6605). Next, an initial value is set in a variable time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6606). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S6605 is determined according to the fluctuation mode indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command.

  After the processing of S6606, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S6607). On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6602, if the change display of the third symbol is being executed (changed) (S6602: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the change time counter (S6610), and the process of S6607 It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S6607 is within the variation time (S6607: Yes), the variation display process is executed (S6608), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78). . The variation display process (S6608) is a process of executing variation display (that is, variation effect) of the symbol (third symbol). Although not shown, the variation display processing (FIG. 27), S1303, S1304, and S1306 are omitted.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6607, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S6607: No), the display stop symbol command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed. The stop symbol extracted from is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S6612). After the process of S6612, the changing mode change flag 233g is turned off (S6613), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  As a result of the determination in S6603, if the variation start flag is off (S6603: No), each display process is executed (S6611), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 28). Return to Reference). Each display process (S1275) is a process for executing a display process such as a customer waiting effect that is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, although illustration is omitted. Processing similar to each display processing (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment described above is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in the power saving mode, the display device used to display the stop symbol is switched from the third symbol display device 81 to the power saving symbol display device 181. It is configured as follows. Since the 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c constituting the power saving symbol display device 181 consume less power than the LCD constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suitable power saving effect can be obtained.

  In addition, since the result selected by the jackpot lottery affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. There is a tendency to pay particular attention to the decorative third pattern that makes it easy to discriminate the result. Therefore, when the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the stop symbol according to the third symbol is not displayed, the player has difficulty in grasping the lottery result, thereby causing the game tempo to deteriorate, If the continuation continues, there may be inconveniences such as doubting whether the jackpot lottery was really or justified. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, instead of turning off the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol indicating the result of the big win lottery is represented by a combination of numbers using the power saving symbol display device 181. Thus, the above-described inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the backlight of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to favorably save power. However, on the other hand, since the power of the VDP is turned off, it takes time to start (return) the VDP even if the power is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode and the power is turned on again. There is a problem in that an image cannot be displayed normally on the 3 symbol display device 81 immediately. In response to this problem, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the return standby flag 223p is kept on for the return standby time, and the power saving symbol display is performed. Since the device 181 is configured not to be turned off, the display by the power-saving symbol display device 181 can be continued until the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, and the player can change the symbol display. It is possible to prevent a display such as a stop symbol from being visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which interest is lost due to power saving by turning off the power supply of the VDP. Thereby, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the seventh embodiment, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, in the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off to save power. It is. As described above, when the power supply of the VDP is turned off, there is a problem that when the power supply to the VDP is turned on again, an image cannot be displayed normally on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In order to deal with such a problem, the sixth embodiment is configured such that the power-saving symbol display device 181 is not turned off for a predetermined return waiting time when the power-saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the switch from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, when the variable display is started during the elapse of a predetermined return waiting time, it is provided exclusively for the return of the VDP. In other words, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than the return waiting time is selected to ensure that the player has an opportunity to visually recognize the variation effect even if it is a part of the variation pattern. Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the symbol variation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is also executed at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends, the jackpot is related. A predetermined stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is forcibly interrupted and displayed so that the player can surely know the lottery result regarding the jackpot. Thereby, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power. Note that in the seventh embodiment, identical symbols are assigned to parts identical to those in the first through sixth embodiments described above and descriptions thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG.80 and FIG.81, the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 of 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 80 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 81 is a block diagram illustrating configurations of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 according to the seventh embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in that the power saving button 23 and the effect button 53 are connected not only to the audio lamp control device 113 but also to the main control device 110. That is, the power saving button 23 and the effect button 53 are connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the power saving button 23 or the effect button 53 is operated, a signal from the operated button is input to both the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113.

  FIG. 82A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the RAM 203 includes a return waiting counter 203a, a return selection flag 203b, a power saving flag 203c, and a customer waiting effect flag 203d.

  When the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, the return standby counter 203a is set to return standby time (that is, a period of waiting for normal recovery of the third symbol display device 81: 25 in this embodiment). Second). This return waiting counter 203a is set to zero (zero clear) when the RAM 203 is initialized when the power is turned on, and an initial value is set when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode.

  One of the cases where the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode is when the power saving button 23 is operated when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode. Therefore, when the power saving button 23 is operated when the power consumption mode is the power saving mode, an initial value is set in the return standby counter 203a.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment automatically switches the power consumption mode to the power saving mode when the customer waiting effect is started, and automatically sets the power consumption mode to the normal state when the customer waiting effect is canceled. It is configured to be switched to the consumption mode. Therefore, even when a condition for canceling the execution of the customer waiting effect is satisfied during the customer waiting effect, an initial value is set in the return waiting counter 203a. In addition, as conditions for canceling the execution of the customer waiting effect in the present embodiment, a case where a ball wins the first entrance 64 during the customer waiting effect, and a case where a ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, There are three cases, that is, when the power saving button 23 or the effect button 53 is operated during the customer waiting effect.

  When an initial value is set in the return waiting counter 203a, the value is updated in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86) executed every 2 milliseconds. That is, when an initial value is set in the return waiting counter 203a, it is updated every 2 milliseconds. Therefore, for example, when 25 seconds is counted as the return standby time using the return standby counter 203a, 12500 is set as the initial value in the return standby counter 203a.

  The return selection flag 203b is a flag indicating whether or not to set a change pattern provided exclusively for the return of the VDP (image controller 236) in the change start process (see FIG. 85). When the return time selection flag 203b is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that a variation pattern provided exclusively for the return time of the VDP is set. On the other hand, when the return-time selection flag 203b is set to OFF (that is, “0”), it indicates that a normal fluctuation pattern is set instead of the fluctuation pattern provided exclusively for the return of the VDP. . This return selection flag 203b is set to OFF (ie, “0”) when the RAM 203 is initialized when the power is turned on. Then, when the value of the return waiting counter 203a is larger than 0, when the variation display is started by winning a ball to the first ball entrance 64 or digesting the reserved ball, or the first ball entrance 64 When the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled due to the winning of the ball to the ball (that is, when the start timing of the return waiting time is substantially equal to the start timing of the fluctuation display), the return selection flag 203b is turned on. Is set. Thereafter, in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 85), when the fluctuation pattern is set, the return selection flag 203b is set to OFF.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display is started during the period until the return waiting time elapses (including the timing when the return waiting time is started), the return is performed. Since the hour selection flag 203b is set to ON, in such a case, a variation pattern provided exclusively for VDP recovery is set. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern provided exclusively for the return of the VDP is set to a time longer than the return standby time (for example, 25 seconds). Therefore, if the variable display is started during the period until the return waiting time elapses, the player will perform an effect with a variable time longer than the return standby time. Can be reliably recognized. In particular, at the end of the variation production, there will be an effect that expects a lottery result regarding the jackpot, so at least only at the end of the game, the player will be able to visually recognize the variation production to give the player an interest in the variation production. Can do.

  The power saving flag 203c is a flag indicating which of the two power consumption modes (normal consumption mode and power saving mode) is set as the power consumption mode. When the power saving flag 203c is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”). Indicates that the power consumption mode is not set to the power saving mode, that is, the normal power consumption mode is set. The power saving flag 203c is set off when the RAM 203 is initialized when the power is turned on. After that, every time the power consumption mode is switched, ON and OFF are alternately switched.

  The customer waiting effect flag 203d is a flag indicating whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is in the customer waiting effect. When the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to on (that is, “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed. When the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to off (that is, “0”), This indicates that the waiting effect is not performed (that is, changing or jackpot). The customer waiting effect flag 203d is set off when the RAM 203 is initialized when the power is turned on. Then, the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to ON when the execution condition of the customer waiting effect is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the case where the symbol variation display is not executed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) is set as the execution condition of the customer waiting effect.

  On the other hand, the customer waiting effect flag 203d set to ON is set to OFF when the condition for canceling the execution of the customer waiting effect is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the ball is won at the first entrance 64 during the customer waiting effect, when the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect, the power saving button 23 or the effect button during the customer waiting effect. The case where 53 is operated is a condition for canceling the execution of the customer waiting effect.

  FIG. 82B is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the work RAM 233 of this embodiment has a return standby flag 233p and a return stop symbol flag 233q in addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment (233b, 233e, 233g). ing.

  The return waiting flag 233p is a flag indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. When the return waiting flag 233p is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the third symbol display device 81 is waiting for return. The return waiting flag 233p is set to off (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on. Thereafter, when the display control device 117 receives a customer waiting effect cancellation command or a lighting restart command from the sound lamp control device 113, the return waiting flag 233p is set to ON. The return standby flag 233p that is set to ON is set to OFF when the display control device 117 receives a standby period elapsed command from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, during the period when the return standby flag 233p is set to ON (that is, until the return standby time elapses). During this period, a variation mode dedicated to the return of the VDP (image controller 236) is extracted (selected) as a variation mode. In the present embodiment, the variation mode provided exclusively for the return of the VDP is configured such that the variation time is longer than the return standby time (for example, 25 seconds). Therefore, when the variable display is started during the period until the return standby time elapses, a variation mode longer than the return standby time is selected (that is, an effect with a variation time longer than the return standby time is executed). Therefore, the player can surely visually recognize a part of the variation effect. In particular, at the end of the variation production, there will be an effect that expects a lottery result regarding the jackpot, so at least only at the end of the game, the player will be able to visually recognize the variation production to give the player an interest in the variation production. Can do.

  The return stop symbol flag 233q is a flag indicating whether or not a predetermined stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “return stop symbol”) is forcibly displayed at the end timing of the return standby time. When the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the return stop symbol is forcibly displayed at the end timing of the return standby time. On the other hand, when the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to OFF (that is, “0”), it indicates that the return stop symbol is not displayed at the end timing of the return standby time. The return stop symbol flag 233q is set to OFF (ie, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on. After that, when the display control device 117 receives a customer waiting effect cancellation command or a lighting restart command from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 117 is in a variable display, and the remaining time of the variable display is a return waiting time (for example, , 25 seconds), the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to ON. The return stop symbol flag 233q set to ON is set to OFF when the return stop symbol is displayed at the timing when the return standby time has elapsed.

  Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display is being performed at the timing when the mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, and the remaining time of the variable display is longer than the return waiting time, Since the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to ON, in this case, the return stop symbol is displayed at the timing when the return standby time has elapsed. When the 3rd symbol display device 81 returns to normal after the power to the VDP is turned on again, a series of fluctuating effects are displayed from the middle, and when the effect that expects the lottery result regarding the jackpot is halfway It is difficult for a player to expect a big hit because of the fluctuating effects, which may cause adverse effects such as irritation and lose the interest of the game. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is being executed even at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends. The stop symbol at the time of return corresponding to the lottery result related to the jackpot is forcibly displayed as an interrupt, so that the player can know the lottery result as the return waiting time ends, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of expecting a big hit from the production.

  FIG. 82 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the character ROM 235 of the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the character ROM 235 of the present embodiment, normal-time fluctuation display data 235a and return-time fluctuation display are provided as various data for presentation used for fluctuation display (variation presentation), jackpot presentation, and the like. Data 235b, return stop symbol data 235c, and the like are stored.

  The normal-time fluctuation display data 235a is fluctuation display data applied to the fluctuation display that is started when the return waiting time is not in the period (that is, normal time). In the present embodiment, as the normal time fluctuation display data 235a, the fluctuation display data for out-of-range fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 11 seconds, the fluctuation display data for normal reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, and the fluctuation time of 40 seconds. And fluctuation display data for super reach fluctuation. A plurality of types of variation display data for out-of-range variation, variation display data for normal reach variation, and variation display data for super reach variation are prepared.

  The return fluctuation display data 235b is fluctuation display data applied to the fluctuation display started during the period until the return waiting time elapses. In the present embodiment, the return-time fluctuation display data 235b is composed of fluctuation display data having a fluctuation time longer than the return standby time (for example, a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more). Specifically, as the fluctuation display data 235b at the time of return, fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation whose fluctuation time is 30 seconds, fluctuation display data for normal reach fluctuation whose fluctuation time is 35 seconds, and fluctuation time of 40 seconds. Fluctuation display data for a certain super reach variation is prepared. A plurality of types of variation display data for out-of-range variation, variation display data for normal reach variation, and variation display data for super reach variation are prepared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, all of the variation display data prepared as the variation display data 235b at the time of recovery has a variation time longer than the recovery standby time. Therefore, during the period until the recovery standby time elapses. By selecting the variation display mode to be started from the variation display data stored in the return variation display data 235b, the player can surely view a part of the variation effect.

  In addition, in the fluctuation display data for fluctuation of reach (normal reach or super reach), it is preferable that an effect that expects a lottery result related to jackpot to appear after a period of return waiting time (for example, 25 seconds) from the start of fluctuation. . An effect that expects a lottery result related to the jackpot to appear after the start of fluctuation and after the return waiting time period, allowing the player to visually recognize the fluctuation effect even at least at the end of the game. Can be interesting.

  In the present embodiment, the return fluctuation display data 235b is composed of fluctuation display data having a fluctuation time longer than the return standby time. However, at least lottery related to jackpots such as reach (normal reach or super reach) fluctuations. The variation display data for the variation display including the effect that expects the result may be variation display data having a variation time longer than the return waiting time. That is, the fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation may be fluctuation display data having a fluctuation time shorter than the return waiting time. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation stored as the return fluctuation display data 235b may be the same as the fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation stored as the normal fluctuation display data 235a. If the fluctuation display data for out-of-range fluctuation stored as the return-time fluctuation display data 235b is the same as the fluctuation display data for out-of-range fluctuation stored as the normal-time fluctuation display data 235a, the fluctuation display data at the time of return is displayed. The fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation stored as normal fluctuation display data 235a may be used without preparing fluctuation display data for deviation fluctuation as the data 235b.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display data for super reach fluctuation stored as the fluctuation display data 235b at return and the fluctuation display data for super reach fluctuation stored as the normal fluctuation display data 235a are the same fluctuation. Although the fluctuation display data of time is used, the normal fluctuation display data 235a and the return fluctuation display data 235b may be the same data or different data. When the fluctuation display data for super reach fluctuation stored as the return fluctuation display data 235b is the same as the fluctuation display data for super reach fluctuation stored as the normal fluctuation display data 235a, the fluctuation display data at the time of return is displayed. Fluctuation display data for super reach variation may be used instead of the fluctuation display data for super reach variation as the data 235b, instead of the variation display data for super reach variation stored as the normal variation display data 235a.

  The return stop symbol data 235c is return stop symbol data displayed at the end timing of the return standby time. As return stop symbol data 235c, data corresponding to one combination indicating a probable jackpot, data corresponding to one combination indicating a normal jackpot, and data corresponding to one combination indicating a loss are prepared. Yes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83 (a), a description will be given of how the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment handles a change display when the return waiting time elapses. FIG. 83 (a) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change display and the return waiting time when it is started during the period until the return waiting time elapses. In this timing chart, the horizontal axis indicates time t.

  As shown in FIG. 83A, after the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off at time t1, the power of the VDP is turned on at time t2 (when the power is turned on again). ) From this timing, the return waiting time is counted. In the present embodiment, 25 seconds is set as the return standby time, and at the time t3, the measurement of the return standby time ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the period until the return standby time elapses (that is, the period from time t2 to time t3), the fluctuation mode dedicated to the VDP return is extracted (selected) as the fluctuation mode. It is configured as follows. The variation mode dedicated to the recovery of the VDP is a time (30 seconds or more in the present embodiment) in which the variation time is longer than the recovery standby time.

  Thus, even when the ball is won at the first entrance 64 and the variation display is started at the timing when the power is reapplied to the VDP (that is, the time t2 = the variation start time ts1), the variation occurs. The timing when the display is finished and the stop symbol is displayed (variation end time te1) is after the end timing (time t3) of the return waiting time.

  Similarly, when the fluctuation display is started before the return waiting time elapses (that is, time t2 <fluctuation start time ts2 <time t3), the fluctuation display ends and the stop symbol is displayed. The timing (variation end time te2) is after the end timing (time t3) of the return waiting time.

  When power is reapplied to the VDP, it takes time to start (return) the VDP, so that it is not possible to immediately display an image normally on the third symbol display device 81. However, the pachinko machine of this embodiment According to No. 10, in the period until the return waiting time elapses, the fluctuation mode dedicated to the return of the VDP is extracted as the fluctuation mode. As described above, in this embodiment, the return standby time is set to 25 seconds, and the change time of the change mode dedicated to the return of VDP is set to 30 seconds or more. Therefore, the first input is performed at the timing when power is supplied to the VDP again. Even if the ball is won at the ball opening 64 and the variable display is started, the variable display is executed for at least 5 seconds after the return waiting time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can surely visually recognize a part of the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect), and can give the player interest by the fluctuation effect.

  Next, referring to FIG. 83 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the symbol variation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is a predetermined return waiting time. A description will be given of how to handle a case in which the process is being executed even at the timing when the process ends. FIG. 83 (b) shows the change display and the return standby time when the change display is not executed even after the predetermined return standby time is finished, even before the change from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship. In this timing chart, the horizontal axis indicates time t.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), in this embodiment, during the period when the power of the VDP is turned off, the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display ends after the end timing of the return waiting time. In this case (ie, time t1 <variation start time ts3 <time t2 and time t3 <variation end time te3), the return stop symbol is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the return standby time (time t3). Is displayed.

  After the power supply to the VDP is turned on again, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 returns to normal, a series of variation effects is displayed from the middle, and the effect that expects the lottery result regarding the jackpot is halfway Since it becomes difficult for the player to expect a big hit from the variation production, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be lost due to adverse effects such as irritation. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the change display of the symbols being executed during the period when the power of the VDP is turned off (that is, before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode) After the VDP is turned on again, if it is being executed even at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends, as described above, at the end timing of the return waiting time (time t3), depending on the lottery result regarding the jackpot The return stop symbol is forcibly displayed. Therefore, since the player can surely know the lottery result with the end of the return waiting time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of expecting a big hit from the variation effect.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 89. In the seventh embodiment, among the processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, control processes other than the control processes described later with reference to FIGS. 84 to 89 (start-up process, main process, holding ball) The storage area sequential feed processing and NMI interrupt processing are as shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 11, 12, 14, and 18 described above.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the variation process of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The variation process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110, similarly to the variation process (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above. Of the processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 12), the same processes as those in the first embodiment described above are executed except for the fluctuation process (S204) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the variation process of the seventh embodiment, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301), and if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S302: No), the special figure reservation ball number N is acquired (S303).

  After the processing of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N> 0 (S304: Yes), the value of the return waiting counter 203a is set. It is determined whether or not it is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the return waiting time is being measured (S321).

  If the value of the return standby counter 203a is larger than 0, that is, if the return standby time is being measured (S321: Yes), the return time selection flag 203b is set to ON (step S321: Yes). S322), the reserved ball storage area forward feed process is executed (S355). Therefore, in the period until the return waiting time elapses, when the change display due to the digestion of the reserved ball is started, the return time selection flag 203b is set to ON by the processing of S322, so FIG. In the fluctuation start process (S306), which will be described later with reference to this, a fluctuation pattern provided exclusively for the return of the VDP is set.

  On the other hand, if the value of the return standby counter 203a is 0 as a result of the determination by the process of S321, that is, if the return standby time is not being measured (S321: No), the process of S322 is skipped, and the holding ball The storage area sequential feed process is executed (S355; see FIG. 14). Therefore, when the return waiting time is not being measured, the return time selection flag 203b is kept off, so that a normal fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation start process (S306) described later with reference to FIG. Will be.

  After execution of the reserved ball storage area forward process (S355), a change start process is executed (S306), and the change process (S204) is terminated. Note that the processing content of the variation start processing (S306) of this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of checking in the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the change time has passed (S307). At this time, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308). On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display is set to stop the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 (S309). After setting the stop command (S310), the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  As a result of the determination in S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting effect is being performed, that is, whether the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on. Is discriminated (S325). At this time, if the customer waiting effect flag 203d is ON, that is, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S325: Yes), the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S325, when the customer waiting effect flag 203d is off, that is, when the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S325: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is shown. Is determined to be on (S312). At this time, if the customer waiting effect waiting flag is off (S312: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned on (S313), and the counting of the customer waiting effect waiting time is started using a counter (not shown) (S314). Then, the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  Further, as a result of the determination in S312, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start of time measurement in S314 (S315). If the predetermined time has not elapsed (S315: No) ) Since it is during the period of waiting for the execution of the customer waiting effect, the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed as a result of the determination in S315 (S315: Yes), since it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, a customer waiting effect command is set (S316), and the customer waiting effect is set. The standby flag is turned off (S317). After the process of S317, the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to ON (S323), the power saving flag 203c is set to ON (S324), and the variation process (S204) is terminated.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the variation start process (S306) of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In the variation start process of the seventh embodiment, when the return selection flag 203b is on, a variation pattern provided exclusively for the recovery of the VDP (hereinafter referred to as “variation pattern for recovery”). Is different from the variation start process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 in that the normal variation pattern is determined.

  Specifically, in the change start process (S306) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area ( S401). At this time, if it is determined that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the display mode for the big hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S402).

  After the process of S402, it is determined whether or not the return selection flag 203b is on (S411). If the result of determination in S411 is that the return selection flag 203b is on (S411: Yes), the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and Based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern for return is determined (S412), the return selection flag 203b is set to OFF (S413), and the process The process proceeds to S404.

  In S412, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough symbol variation variation time is selected from the normal reach variation for return (35 seconds) and the super reach variation for recovery (40 seconds). And a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S411 is that the return selection flag 203b is off (S411: No), the jackpot indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area Based on the values of the type and variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot, a normal variation pattern is determined (S414), and the process proceeds to S404.

  In S414, the normal normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, similarly to S403 executed in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 15) of the first embodiment described above, From the super-reach fluctuation (40 seconds) for return, the fluctuation time of the rough symbol fluctuation is determined, and the fluctuation until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) is determined.

  By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S412 or S414, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. The

  As in the first embodiment, in S412 or S414, the variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Whether to set only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 or to set both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 depends on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game condition each time. You may comprise so that it may determine suitably according to it.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408). After the processing of S408, it is determined whether or not the return selection flag 203b is on (S415). If the return selection flag 203b is turned on as a result of the determination in S415 (S411: Yes), the stop at the time indicated by the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is stopped. Based on the symbols and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S416), and the return time selection flag 203b is set to OFF ( S417), the process proceeds to S404.

  In S412, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough symbol variation variation time is determined from outlier variation (30 seconds), normal reach variation (35 seconds), and super reach variation (40 seconds). At the same time, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs is determined.

  On the other hand, if the return time selection flag 203b is OFF as a result of the determination in the process of S415 (S415: No), the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area indicates an outlier Based on the stop symbol and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a deviation variation pattern is determined as a normal variation pattern (S418), and the process proceeds to S404.

  In S418, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough symbol variation variation time is determined from outlier variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), and super reach variation (40 seconds). At the same time, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs is determined.

  By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S416 or S418, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. The

  As in the first embodiment, in the process of S408, if “rearward / rearward reach” or “reach other than frontward / rearward reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuations are always caused by the process of S412 or S414. The table is set in advance so that (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is determined.

  In S404, an effect time (addition / subtraction value of effect time) to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the process of S412, S414, S416, or S418 is determined (S404). After the process of S404, a change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern (change time) determined by the process of S412, S414, S416, or S418 is set (S405). Next, a type command corresponding to the display mode (that is, the stop symbol) set in the process of S402 or S408 is set. (S408). Thereafter, an effect time addition / subtraction command according to the effect time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S404 is set (S407), and the variation start process (S306) is terminated.

  Therefore, according to the variation start process of the seventh embodiment described above, when the return time selection flag 203b is on, that is, when the variation display is started during the time for measuring the return standby time, S412 or S416. Therefore, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than the return waiting time is selected.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed every 2 ms, for example, similarly to the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 16 (see FIG. 16). It is different from the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment in that the update operation 203a and the button operation process (S513) for executing the process according to the operation of the power saving button 23 or the effect button 53 are executed.

  Specifically, in the timer interrupt process of the seventh embodiment, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S501). Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502), and the first per random number counter C1, the first per type classification counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per second The random number counter C4 is updated (S503).

  After the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0 (S511). At this time, if the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0 (S511: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the return standby counter 203a and updated (S512), and the process proceeds to S513. On the other hand, if the result of determination in S511 is that the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0 (S511: Yes), the process of S512 is skipped and the process proceeds to S513.

  In S513, button operation processing is executed (S513). The button operation process (S513) is a process of executing a process according to the operation of the power saving button 23 or the effect button 53, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the button operation process (S513) is executed, a start winning process associated with winning a prize at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504). Note that the processing content of the start winning process (S504) of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S504) is executed, the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that specific processing executed in the firing control processing (S505) of the present embodiment will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the above-described button operation processing (S513). In this button operation process (S513), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the return standby time is being measured (S641).

  If the result of determination in S641 is that the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0, that is, if the return standby time is being measured (S641: Yes), the button operation processing (S513) is terminated and the timer Return to the interrupt process (see FIG. 86). As described above, in this embodiment, even when the power saving button 23 or the effect button 53 is operated while the return waiting time is being measured, the input is invalidated.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S641, when the value of the return standby counter 203a is 0, that is, when the return standby time is not being measured (S641: No), it is determined whether or not the effect button 53 has been operated. A determination is made (S642). At this time, when the effect button 53 is operated (S642: Yes), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on (S643).

  If the result of the determination in S643 is that the customer waiting effect flag 203d is off, that is, the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S643: No), the button operation process (S513) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86). Return to). Thus, in this embodiment, even if the effect button 53 is operated, the input is invalidated unless the customer waiting effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S643, when the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S643: Yes), the effect button 53 is operated during the customer waiting effect. Since the execution of the customer waiting effect is cancelled, in this case, the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to OFF (S644). Next, a customer waiting effect cancellation command is set (S645). Note that the customer waiting effect cancellation command set by the process of S645 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Moreover, since the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode due to the cancellation of the customer waiting effect, the power saving flag 203c is set to OFF after the execution of S645 (S646). After the process of S646, an initial value is set in the return standby counter 203a (S647), the button operation process (S513) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86). In this embodiment, the recovery standby time measured by the recovery standby counter 203a is 25 seconds, and the recovery standby counter 203a is updated every 2 ms. Therefore, in S647, 12500 is set as an initial value. .

  If it is determined in step S642 that the effect button 53 has not been operated (S642: No), it is determined whether or not the power saving button 23 has been operated (S648). At this time, if the power saving button 23 is operated (S648: Yes), it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 203c is on (S649).

  As a result of the determination in S649, if the power saving flag 203c is on, that is, if the power consumption mode is the power saving mode (S649: Yes), the power consumption mode is changed from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23. In such a case, the power saving flag 203c is set to OFF (S651).

  After the process of S651, the process proceeds to S643. At this time, when the customer waiting effect flag 203d is off, that is, when the customer waiting effect is not being executed (S643: No), the button operation process (S513) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S643 is that the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on, that is, the customer waiting effect is in progress (S643: Yes), the processing of S644 to S647 is executed. As described above, when the power saving button 23 is operated during the customer waiting effect, the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled in the same manner as when the effect button 53 is operated during the customer waiting effect. The customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to OFF, and an initial value is set to the return waiting counter 203a in S647. Note that if it is determined Yes in S649 and Yes in S643, the process of S646 may be omitted from the processes of S644 to S647.

  When the power saving flag 203c is turned off as a result of the determination in the process of S649, that is, when the power consumption mode is the normal consumption mode (S649: No), the power consumption mode is changed to the normal consumption mode by operating the power saving button 23. In this case, the power saving flag 203c is set to ON (S650), the button operation process (S513) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  If the result of determination in S648 is that the power saving button 23 has not been operated (S648: No), the button operation process (S513) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) of the seventh embodiment. In the start winning process (S504) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has won (start winning prize) in the first entrance 64 (S601). At this time, if it is determined that the ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S601: No), the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 86). .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 as a result of the determination in S601 (S601: Yes), whether or not the value of the return waiting counter 203a is greater than 0, that is, It is determined whether or not the return waiting time is being measured (S621).

  If the value of the return waiting counter 203a is 0 as a result of the determination in the process of S621, that is, if the return waiting time is not being measured (S621: No), whether or not the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on. Is determined (S622). As a result of the determination in S622, when the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S622: Yes), a ball is won at the first entrance 64 during the customer waiting effect. Since the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled due to (entering), in this case, the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to OFF (S623). Next, a customer waiting effect cancellation command is set (S624). Note that the customer waiting effect cancellation command set by the process of S624 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Since the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled, the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Therefore, after the execution of S624, the power saving flag 203c is set to OFF (S625). Next, the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled by the winning of the ball at the first entrance 64 (that is, the start timing of the return waiting time is almost equal to the start timing of the fluctuation display) The selection flag 203b is set to ON (S626), and the process proceeds to S602.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S622 is that the customer waiting effect flag 203d is off, that is, the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S622: No), the process of S623 to S626 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S602. To do.

  If the value of the return standby counter 203a is greater than 0 as a result of the determination in S621, that is, if the return standby time is being measured (S621: Yes), the value of the special figure holding ball number N is It is determined whether or not it is 0 (S627). At this time, if the value of the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S627: No), the process proceeds to S602.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S627, when the value of the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S627: Yes), the return waiting time is being measured (that is, during the period until the return waiting time elapses). ) Indicates that the ball has won the first entrance 64, in this case, the return selection flag 203b is set to ON (S626), and the process proceeds to S602.

  In S602, a start winning command is set (S602). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603). At this time, if the number of reserved special figure balls N <4 is not satisfied (S603: No), the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interruption process (see FIG. 86).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S603, if the number of special figure holding balls N <4 (S603: Yes), each of the current first per-random number counter C1, first per-type counter C2, and stop pattern selection counter C3 The value is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). Next, 1 is added to the special figure holding ball number N (S605), a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after addition is set (S606), and the value of the special figure holding ball counter (special Depending on the number of reserved balls N), the new number of times of holding is displayed by the number of lighting LEDs constituting the special figure holding lamp 37c of the first symbol display device 37 (S607), and the start winning process (S504) is performed. End and return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the launch control process (S505) of the seventh embodiment. In the launch control process (S505) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether a launch permission signal is input from the payout control device 111 (S661). The launch permission signal is detected by a touch sensor (not shown) that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a signal output from the payout control device 111 on the condition.

  If the result of determination in S661 is that a launch permission signal has been input (S661: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the launch timing (S662). In the present embodiment, the embodiment is configured such that the emission timings arrive at intervals of 0.6 s.

  As a result of the determination in the process of S662, if it is the launch timing (S662: Yes), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect flag is on (S663). At this time, when the customer waiting effect flag 203d is on, that is, when the customer waiting effect is being performed (S663: Yes), the execution of the customer waiting effect is canceled because the ball is fired during the customer waiting effect. Therefore, in such a case, the customer waiting effect flag 203d is set to OFF (S664). Next, a customer waiting effect cancellation command is set (S665). Note that the customer waiting effect cancellation command set by the process of S665 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 12).

  Further, since the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode due to the cancellation of the customer waiting effect, the power saving flag 203c is set to OFF after the execution of S665 (S666). After the process of S666, an initial value is set in the return waiting counter 203a (S667), and the process proceeds to S668. In this embodiment, 12500 is set as an initial value in the return waiting counter 203a in S667.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S663 is that the customer waiting effect flag 203d is off, that is, the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S663: No), the process of S664 to S667 is skipped and the process proceeds to S668. To do.

  In S668, a firing control signal (firing pulse) and a firing control signal are output to the firing control device 122 via the payout control device 111 (S668). Upon receiving this launch control signal, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched. After the process of S668, the firing control process (S505) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S661, when the launch permission signal is not input (S661: No), or when the result of the determination by the process of S662 is not the discharge timing (S662: No), S663 to S669. This process is skipped, the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 86).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 90 and 91.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the power-saving symbol display control process (S6113) of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. The power-saving symbol display control process of the seventh embodiment is similar to the power-saving symbol display control process (see FIG. 73) of the sixth embodiment described above. It is a process executed in Of the processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 69), except for the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) shown in FIG. 90 and the command determination process (S6117) described later with reference to FIG. The same processing as in the sixth embodiment described above is executed.

  In the power saving symbol display control process (S6113) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the power saving flag 223h is on (S6261). If the power saving flag 223h is on (S6261: Yes). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S6262). As a result of the determination in the process of S6262, if it is not a big hit (S6262: No), it is determined whether or not it is changing (during symbol change display) (S6263). At this time, if not changing (S6263: No), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing (change start timing) of the change display by the third symbol display device 81 (S6264).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S6264, if it is the fluctuation start timing (S6264: Yes), the process proceeds to S6265. Also, if the result of determination in S6263 is that there is a change (S3403: Yes), the process proceeds to S6265.

  In S6265, it is determined whether or not it is the symbol stop timing (S6265). If it is not the symbol stop timing (S6265: No), the variable display by the power-saving symbol display device 181 is executed (S6266). After the processing of S6266, the power saving symbol display control device is terminated and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6265, when it is the symbol stop timing (S6265: Yes), the stop symbol set based on the type command received from the main controller 110 is used as the symbol display device for power saving 181. (181a to 181c) are displayed (S6273). After the process of S6273, the power saving symbol display control device is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S6264, if it is not the change start timing (S6264: No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is not in progress (S6272: No), the power-saving symbol display control device is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S6272, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S6272: Yes), the power-saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S6270), the power-saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the main Return to the processing (see FIG. 69).

  If the result of the determination in S6262 is a big hit (S6262: Yes), the stop symbol displayed on the power saving symbol display device 181 is blinked (S6271). After the process of S6271, the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, if the power saving flag 223h is OFF as a result of the determination in the process of S6261 (S6261: No), it is determined whether or not the return waiting flag 223p is ON (S6267). If the return standby flag 223p is on as a result of the determination in the process of S6267 (S6267: Yes), the return standby time (25 seconds in this embodiment) is set after the return standby flag 223p is set on. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (S6268). At this time, if the return waiting time has not yet elapsed (S6268: No), the process proceeds to S6262.

  On the other hand, if the return standby time has elapsed as a result of the determination in the process of S6267 (S6267: Yes), the return standby flag 223p is set to off (S6269). Next, a standby period elapsed command is output to the display control device 114 (S7261). After the process of S7261, the power-saving symbol display device 181 is turned off (S6270). After the process of S6270, the power saving symbol device display control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). If the result of determination in S6267 is that the return standby flag 223p is off (S6267: No), the process proceeds to S6270.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S6117) of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. The command determination process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 69) of the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 76) of the sixth embodiment described above. It is.

  In the command determination process (S6117) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S6341). At this time, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S6341: No), the process proceeds to S6342.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of determination in the process of S6341 (S6341: Yes), a variation pattern command reception flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON. (S6349). Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S6350). The process proceeds to S6342.

  When the variation pattern command reception flag is turned on by the processing of S6349, in the decorative symbol variation setting process (S6116; refer to FIG. 69), it is extracted from the variation pattern command by the processing of S6350, as in the sixth embodiment described above. An effect mode of change display (change effect) according to the set change time is set, and a display change pattern command corresponding to the set change display effect mode is output to the display control device 114.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable display is started during the period until the return standby time elapses (including the timing when the return standby time is started), the audio lamp control device 113 performs the main control. A return variation pattern is received from the device 110. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the return variation pattern from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to the return variation pattern to the display control device 114.

  On the other hand, when the change display is started when the return waiting time is not being measured and the customer waiting effect is not being produced, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a normal change pattern from the main control device 110. Receive. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a normal variation pattern from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display variation pattern command corresponding to the normal variation pattern to the display control device 114.

  In S6342, it is determined whether a type command has been received from main controller 110 (S6342). At this time, if the type command has not been received (S6342: No), the process proceeds to S6343. On the other hand, if the type command is received from the main control device 110 as a result of the determination by the process of S6342 (S6342: Yes), the display form of the stop symbol is extracted from the type command (S6351), and the process proceeds to S6343. To do.

  In S6343, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S6343). At this time, if a stop command has not been received (S6343: No), the process proceeds to S6344. On the other hand, if a stop command is received from the main controller 110 as a result of the determination in the process of S6343 (S6343: Yes), the stop command is output to the display controller 114 (S6352), and the process proceeds to S6344. .

  In S 6344, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect command is received from main controller 110 (S 6344). At this time, if the customer waiting effect command has not been received (S6344: No), the process proceeds to S7341. On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S6344, when a customer waiting effect command is received from the main control device 110 (S6344: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is output to the display control device 114 (S6353), and S7341 Transition to processing.

  In S7341, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting effect cancellation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S7341). At this time, when the customer waiting effect cancellation command is not received from the main control device 110 (S7341: No), the process proceeds to S6345. On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S7341, if a customer waiting effect cancellation command is received (S7341: Yes), the customer waiting effect cancellation command is output to the display control device 114 (S7342), and the process proceeds to S6345. To do.

  In S6345, it is determined whether or not a start winning command is received from the main controller 110 (S6345). At this time, when the start winning command is not received (S6345: No), the process proceeds to S6346. On the other hand, if the start winning command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6345 (S6345: Yes), the starter LED lighting control process for controlling the lighting of the starter LED 347 is executed (S6354), and the process of S6346 is performed. Migrate to

  In the process of S6346, it is determined whether an error command has been received from main controller 110 (S6346). At this time, if an error command has not been received (S6346: No), the process proceeds to S6348. On the other hand, if an error command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6346 (S6346: Yes), the lighting pattern corresponding to the received error command (that is, according to the error content) is sent to the fourth LED control device 294. (Lighting pattern) and light emission with normal luminance are set (S6355, S6356), and the process proceeds to S6348.

  In the process of S6348, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6348). At this time, if no other command has been received (S6348: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6348 (S6348: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6359), the command determination process is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 69).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 92 to 95. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an external interrupt process according to the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114. The external interrupt process of the seventh embodiment is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, similarly to the external interrupt process (see FIG. 77) of the sixth embodiment described above.

  In the external interrupt process of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is an effect permission command (S6401). At this time, if the received command is not an effect permission command (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6402. On the other hand, if the received command is an effect permission command as a result of the determination in the process of S6401 (S6401: Yes), an effect permission flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S6401). ), The process proceeds to S6402.

  In the process of S6402, it is determined whether the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a display variation pattern command (S6402). At this time, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S6402: No), the process proceeds to S6403. On the other hand, if the received command is a display variation pattern command as a result of the determination in the process of S6402 (S6402: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 is set to ON ( S6412).

  After the processing of S6412, a variation mode extraction process for extracting the variation mode indicated by the display variation pattern command is executed (S6413). At this time, the process proceeds to S6403. With the reception of the display variation pattern command, variation display is executed in the third symbol display device 81. This variation display is performed in the variation mode extracted by the process of S6413. Details of the variation mode extraction process (S6413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a display stop symbol command (S6403). At this time, if the received command is not a display stop symbol command (S6403: No), The processing shifts to S6404. On the other hand, if the received command is a display stop symbol command as a result of the determination in the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the stop symbol indicated by the display stop symbol command is extracted (S6414), and the process proceeds to S6404. To do.

  In the process of S6404, it is determined whether the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is a customer waiting effect command (S6404). At this time, if the received command is not a customer waiting effect command (S6404: No), the process proceeds to S6406.

  On the other hand, if the received command is the customer waiting effect command (S6404: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6404, the customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) is set to ON (S6415). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the customer waiting effect command from the main control device 110, it outputs the customer waiting effect command to the display control device 114. The main control device 110 outputs a customer waiting effect command to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the customer waiting effect. Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect command from the sound lamp control device 113, it indicates that the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. In such a case, the process of S6415 is performed. Thereafter, the image controller 236, which is a VDP, is turned off (S6417), the backlight (not shown) of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off (S6418), and the process proceeds to S6405.

  In the process of S6406, it is determined whether or not the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a turn-off command (S6406). At this time, if the received command is not a turn-off command (S6406: No), the process proceeds to S6405. On the other hand, if the received command is a turn-off command as a result of the determination in the process of S6406 (S6406: Yes), the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off (S6417), and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. (Not shown) is turned off (S6418), and the process proceeds to S6405. As described above, the turn-off command is a command output from the sound lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode, the image controller 236 is turned off and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off.

  In the process of S6405, it is determined whether the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405). At this time, if the received command is not a customer waiting effect cancellation command (S6405: No), the process proceeds to S6407.

  On the other hand, if the received command is a customer waiting effect cancellation command as a result of the determination in the process of S6405 (S6405: Yes), the customer waiting effect flag 233e is set to OFF (S6416). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the customer waiting effect cancellation command from the main control device 110, it outputs the customer waiting effect cancellation command to the display control device 114. When the main controller 110 cancels the execution of the customer waiting effect, the main controller 110 outputs a customer waiting effect cancel command to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives the customer waiting effect cancellation command from the sound lamp control device 113, it indicates that the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. In such a case, in S6416 After the processing, the power of the image controller 236 that is a VDP is turned on (S6419), the backlight (not shown) of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on (S6420), and the processing associated with the reactivation of power to the VDP A certain lighting restart process is executed (S7401), and the process proceeds to S7402. The detailed process of the lighting restart process (S7401) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S6407, it is determined whether the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a lighting restart command (S6407). At this time, if the received command is not a lighting restart command (S6407: No), the process proceeds to S7402. On the other hand, if the received command is a lighting restart command (S6407: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S6407, the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned on (S6419), and the back of the third symbol display device 81 is returned. A light (not shown) is turned on (S6420), a lighting restart process is executed (S7401), and the process proceeds to S7402. As described above, the lighting restart command is a command output from the sound lamp control device 113 when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode. Therefore, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, the power of the image controller 236 is turned on (that is, the power is turned on again), and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on. Relight.

  In the process of S7402, it is determined whether the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is a standby period elapsed command (S7402). At this time, if the received command is not a standby period elapsed command (S7402: No), the process proceeds to S6408. On the other hand, if the received command is a waiting period elapsed command (S7402: Yes) as a result of the determination in the process of S7402, the return standby flag 233p is set to ON (S7403), and the process proceeds to S6408. As described above, the standby period elapsed command is a command output from the sound lamp control device 113 when the return standby time has elapsed after the power supply to the VDP is turned on again. Accordingly, when the standby time elapses after the power supply to the VDP is turned on again, the return standby flag 233p is set to off.

  In the process of S6408, it is determined whether the received command is a changing mode command (S6408). At this time, if the received command is not a changing mode command (S6408: No), the process proceeds to S6409. On the other hand, if the received command is the changing mode command (S6408: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S6408, the changing mode change flag 233g is set to ON (S6421), and the process proceeds to S6409.

  In the process of S6409, it is determined whether the received command is an effect mode command (S6409). At this time, if the received command is not an effect mode command (S6409: No), the process proceeds to S6410. On the other hand, if the received command is an effect mode command as a result of the determination in the process of S6409 (S6409: Yes), the effect mode indicated by the received effect mode command (the general effect mode, the notice effect mode, and the accessory effect) A value corresponding to (mode) is set in the effect mode counter 233b (S6422), and the process proceeds to S6410.

  In the process of S6410, it is determined whether another command has been received (S6410). At this time, if no other command is received (S6410: No), the external interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, if another command is received as a result of the determination in the process of S6410 (S6410: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S6423), and the external interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the variation mode extraction processing (S6413) of the seventh embodiment described above. In the variation mode extraction process (S6413) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the received display variation pattern command is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the return variation pattern (S7441). .

  If the received display pattern command is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the return variation pattern as a result of the determination by the processing of S7441 (S7441: Yes), the return variation display data 235b is selected. Then, the variation display data (variation mode) corresponding to the received variation pattern command for display is extracted (S7442).

  On the other hand, if the received display pattern command is not the display variation pattern command corresponding to the return variation pattern as a result of the determination in the process of S7441, that is, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the normal variation pattern. If it is (S7441: No), the fluctuation display data (fluctuation mode) corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command for display is extracted from the normal fluctuation display data 235a (S7443).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the variable display is started during the period until the return standby time elapses (including the timing when the return standby time is started), the display control device 114 is The display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern for return is received from the audio lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the variable display is started when the return waiting time is not being measured and the customer waiting effect is not being performed, the display control device 114 receives the normal variation pattern from the audio lamp control device 113. The display variation pattern command corresponding to is received. Therefore, according to the fluctuation mode extraction process (S6413) of the present embodiment, the normal fluctuation display data 235a or the return fluctuation is determined depending on whether or not the fluctuation display is started during the period until the return waiting time elapses. One of the display data 235b is selected.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the lighting restart processing (S7401) of the seventh embodiment described above. In the lighting restart process (S7401) of the seventh embodiment, first, the return waiting flag 233p is set to ON (S7461).

  After the process of S7461, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being displayed (changed) (S7462). At this time, if the symbol variation is being displayed (S7462: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of a variation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is greater than 1250 (S7463). Since the fluctuation time counter is a counter that is updated every 20 ms, in S7463, it is determined whether or not the remaining time of the fluctuation display of the changing symbol is longer than 25 seconds.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S7463, when the value of the variation time counter is larger than 1250, that is, when the remaining variation display time of the symbol that is changing is longer than 25 seconds (S7463: Yes), the return stop symbol flag 233q is turned on. (S7464), and the lighting restart process (S7401) is terminated. When the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to ON by the processing of S7464, the lottery regarding the big hit is made at the timing when the return waiting time (25 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the power supply to the VDP is turned on again. The return stop symbol corresponding to the result is forcibly displayed as an interrupt.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S7462, when the variation of the symbol is not being displayed (S7462: No), or as a result of the determination by the processing of S7463, the variation of the symbol is being displayed, but the value of the variation time counter is 1250 or less (That is, if the remaining time of the variable display is 25 seconds or less) (S7463: No), the lighting restart process (S7401) is terminated.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S6505) of the seventh embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114. The display effect process of the seventh embodiment is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 78) of the display control device 114, similarly to the display effect process (see FIG. 79) of the sixth embodiment described above. is there. Of the processes executed in the main process (see FIG. 78), the same processes as those in the sixth embodiment described above are executed except for the display effect process (S6505) shown in FIG.

  In the display effect process (S6505) of the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S6601). If the big hit is made (S6601: Yes), the big win effect process is executed (S6609). After the big hit effect process (S6609) ends, the display effect process (S6505) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6601 is not a big hit (S6601: No), it is determined whether or not the symbol is being displayed (changed) (S6602). At this time, if not changing (S6602: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is ON (S6603).

  If the variation start flag is turned on as a result of the determination in S6603 (S6603: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S6604), and the customer waiting effect flag 233e is turned off (S6605). Next, an initial value is set in a variable time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S6606). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the fluctuation time counter in S6605 is a display fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a normal fluctuation pattern or display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a fluctuation pattern at return). Is determined according to the variation mode indicated by.

  After the processing of S6606, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S6607). On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6602, if the change display of the third symbol is being executed (changed) (S6602: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the change time counter (S6610), and the process of S6607 It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S6607 is within the variation time (S6607: Yes), it is determined whether the return stop symbol flag 233q is on (S7601). At this time, if the return stop symbol flag 233q is on (S7601: Yes), it is determined whether the return standby flag 233p is on (S7602). If the result of the determination in S7602 is that the return standby flag 233p is off (S7602: No), the return standby time has elapsed, and a forced interrupt display of the return stop symbol is executed (S7603) The display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78). In S7602, the return stop symbol data is selected from the return stop symbol data 235c according to the lottery result related to the jackpot, and the return stop symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S7601 is that the return stop symbol flag 233q is off (S7601: No), the variable display process is executed (S6608), and the display effect process (S6505) is terminated. Returning to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  If the result of determination in S7602 is that the return standby flag 233p is on (S7602: Yes), since the return standby time has not yet elapsed, the change display process is also executed in this case ( S6608), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S6607, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S6607: No), it is determined whether or not the return stop symbol is being displayed. (S7604). At this time, if the stop symbol at the time of return is not being displayed (S7604: No), the stop symbol extracted from the stop symbol command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. (S6612). After the process of S6612, the changing mode change flag 233g is turned off (S6613), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  If the result of determination in S7604 is that the return stop symbol is being displayed (S7604: Yes), display end processing is executed (S7605), and the variable display ends and the return stop symbol display ends. After the process of S7605, the return stop symbol flag 233q is set to OFF (S7606), and the process proceeds to S6613.

  As a result of the determination in S6603, if the variation start flag is off (S6603: No), each display process is executed (S6611), the display effect process (S6505) is terminated, and the main process (FIG. 28). Return to Reference).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, in the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the VDP (image controller 236) is turned off. Power consumption can be suppressed by that amount, and power saving can be suitably achieved. However, on the other hand, since the power of the VDP is turned off, it takes time to start (return) the VDP even if the power is switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode and the power is turned on again. There is a problem in that an image cannot be displayed normally on the 3 symbol display device 81 immediately.

  In response to such a problem, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the variable display is started while the predetermined return waiting time has elapsed after switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode, A variation pattern in which the time is longer than the return standby time (variation pattern at the time of return) is selected. With this configuration, when the variable display is started during the period until the return standby time elapses (including the timing when the return standby time is started), the effect of the change time longer than the return standby time is produced. Since it is executed, the player can be surely visually recognized a part of the variation effect, and the player can be provided with interest by the variation effect.

In addition, after the power is reapplied to the VDP, when the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, a series of variation effects is displayed from the middle, and the effect that expects the lottery result regarding the jackpot is halfway In some cases, it is difficult for a player to expect a big hit due to the fluctuating effects, which may cause adverse effects such as irritation and lose the interest of the game. However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is being executed even at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends. Is configured to forcibly display a predetermined stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result relating to the jackpot. Therefore, since the player can surely know the lottery result with the end of the return waiting time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of expecting a big hit from the variation effect.
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which interest is lost due to power saving by turning off the power of the VDP. Thereby, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the first to fifth embodiments, the control of the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are performed by one control device (ie, the effect control device). 117) However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which control of sound output and lighting of various light emitting means and control of the third symbol display device 81 are performed by separate control devices.

  For example, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is used as a sound lamp. It is also possible to connect to the control device so that each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device to the display control device. Alternatively, a control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (sound lamp control device) that controls the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is controlled to display. Connected to the device, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device, and from the display control device, the sound lamp control device is instructed to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. Also good. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the sound output control and the lighting control of various light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113, and the control of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114. As in the first to fifth embodiments, the control of the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are performed by one control device ( That is, it may be configured to be performed by the production control device 117). At this time, when the power consumption mode is switched from the normal power consumption mode to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off and the power of the image controller 274 which is a VDP is turned off. do it.

  Alternatively, a control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (sound lamp control device) that controls the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means is controlled to display. Connected to the device, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device, and from the display control device, the sound lamp control device is instructed to control the sound output and lighting of various light emitting means. Also good. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device.

  In the first embodiment, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIG. 21) for updating the power saving counter 273a when the power saving button 23 is operated is included in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117. However, the power consumption mode setting process may be executed in a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Similarly, the power consumption mode setting process (see FIGS. 36 and 46) of the second to fourth embodiments may be executed in a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically (for example, every 2 ms). Good.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113. However, the power saving button 23 may be connected to the main control device 110. When the power saving button 23 is connected to the main control device 110, the operation state of the power saving button 23 is read by the main control device 110, and a command set according to the read operation state is produced by the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control. It may be configured to output to the device 113 and set the power saving counter 273a or the power saving flag 273h by the command. In this case, not only the light emission (lighting or blinking) of the light emitting means (LED, lamp, etc.) controlled by the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113, the operation by the effect movable body 361, but also the main control device. With respect to the light emission of the light emitting means controlled by 110 and the operation by the effect movable body, the power consumption can be changed according to the power consumption mode. For example, the brightness of the special figure holding lamp 37c or the second symbol holding lamp 84, which is an LED, is set to the normal brightness when the normal consumption mode is set as in the first embodiment, and the power saving mode is set. If it is set, it can be set to medium luminance, and if it is set to the large power saving mode, it can be set to zero (that is, turned off).

  When the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the first embodiment, a command set according to the value of the power saving counter 273a is output to the main control device 110. A value of a power saving counter similar to the power saving counter 273a provided in the RAM 203 of the main control means 110 may be set by a command. Similarly, when the power saving button 23 is connected to the effect control device 117 as in the second to fourth embodiments, a command set according to the state of the power saving flag 273h is sent to the main control device 110. A power saving flag similar to the power saving flag 273h provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 may be set according to the output command.

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode) is set, the power consumption is reduced by reducing (decreasing) the luminance of the light emitting means (LED). However, the power consumption may be reduced by thinning out the LEDs that emit light. The second to fourth embodiments may also be configured to reduce power consumption by thinning out the LEDs that emit light when the power saving mode is set. For example, when the power saving mode is set, each of the target LEDs 301 to 310, 321 to 323, and 341 to 346 is turned on every other LED to save power consumption. Also good. In this case, it is preferable that the LEDs at both ends and the LEDs corresponding to the corners are preferentially lit so that the shapes of the LEDs 301 to 310, 321-323, and 341 to 346 do not change as much as possible.

  Further, in the case of flashing light emitting means such as an LED as an effect, in the power saving mode (the power saving mode, the power saving mode), the number of lighting times or the lighting time is reduced compared to the normal consumption mode (that is, the turn-off time is reduced). The power consumption may be reduced by increasing the power consumption. The second to fourth embodiments may also be configured to save power consumption by reducing the number of lighting times or lighting time compared to the normal consumption mode when the power saving mode is set. .

  In the first embodiment, when the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode) is set, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the operation amount of the effect movable body 361. It may be configured to save power consumption by reducing the number of production movable bodies 361 to be operated. Alternatively, in the power saving mode, all of the effect movable bodies 361 may not be operated (stopped). The second to fourth embodiments are also configured to save power consumption by reducing the number of effect movable bodies 361 to be operated when set to the power saving mode, or all effect movable It may be configured to save power consumption by not operating the body 361.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the power consumption is reduced by reducing the luminance of the light emitting means (LED) or reducing the operation amount of the effect movable body 361. However, the output (sound emission) from the speaker device 226 is used. It is good also as a structure which aims at the power-saving of power consumption by making the volume of the sound to be made small. Further, the power consumption may be saved by reducing the number of speaker devices 226 used for sound emission.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, when set to the large power saving mode, it was set as the structure which cannot set an accessory effect mode, but it replaces with or in addition to the accessory effect mode, and cannot set a notice effect mode Also good. Further, in the mode in which power consumption is suppressed compared to the normal consumption mode, only the general effect mode may be selectable.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, when it was set as the large power saving mode, it was set as the structure which cannot set an accessory effect mode by operation of the mode change button 22 after that, When an effect mode is an accessory effect mode In addition, when the large power saving mode is set by operating the power saving button 23, the accessory effect mode set at that time is forcibly changed to another effect mode (for example, the general effect mode). Also good. Alternatively, when the effect mode is the accessory effect mode and the power saving button 23 is operated to set the power saving mode, the player is notified that the current effect mode is the accessory effect mode ( For example, it may be configured to display that on the third symbol display device 81).

  Moreover, in the said 1st, 5th embodiment, although the power consumption mode was comprised from three types, normal consumption mode, a power saving mode, and a large power saving mode, it is 2nd-4th, 4th, 6th, 7th. Similarly to the embodiment, the mode for suppressing the power consumption compared to the normal consumption mode may be only the power saving mode, and the power consumption mode may be configured by two types of the normal consumption mode and the power saving mode. Further, the power saving mode may be divided into three or more types according to the degree of suppressing power consumption, and the power consumption mode may be configured by a normal consumption mode and three or more types of power saving modes.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd-4th, 6th, 7th embodiment, although power consumption mode was comprised from two types, normal consumption mode and power saving mode, according to the degree which suppresses power consumption in power saving mode. It is good also as a structure divided into several modes. For example, as in the first embodiment, the power consumption mode may be configured by three types of a normal power consumption mode, a power saving mode, and a large power saving mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the notification LED 311 is always kept at the normal luminance regardless of the power consumption mode. However, in the case of the light emitting means for notifying various notification events like the notification LED 311, May be configured to reduce the luminance in accordance with its contents. For example, when the notification LED 311 notifies the occurrence of an error, the normal luminance is always maintained regardless of the power consumption mode, and when the notification LED 311 performs notification during payout, the luminance is reduced in the power saving mode. Also good.

  In the first and second embodiments, the third symbol display device 81 is an LCD regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode). However, when the power saving mode is set, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be made narrower than that in the normal consumption mode to save power consumption. For example, when the power consumption mode is set to the normal consumption mode, display is performed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, but when the power saving mode is set, the third symbol display device 81 For example, the reduction display of the effect may be performed using, for example, an area of 80% of the screen, and the remaining area (for example, an area around the screen corresponding to 20% of the whole) may be turned off. On the other hand, when the large power saving mode is set, the effect is reduced and displayed using a smaller area (for example, 60% of the screen of the third symbol display device 81) than when the small power saving mode is set, The remaining area may be turned off. In addition, a shutter member that is normally stored in the center frame 86 and that can be stopped at a position that covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 that is an LCD and that appears from the vertical direction during production is provided. If there is, the area of a predetermined size that can be covered by the shutter member in the 3rd symbol display device 81 may be turned off, and the reduction display of the effect may be performed in the remaining area.

  In the first to fifth embodiments, the third symbol display device 81 which is an LCD is used regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode). However, when the power saving mode is set, the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to a moving image or a still image with less movement than the moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode. Further, it may be configured to save power consumption. In such a case, dedicated effect data for the power saving mode may be provided, or the effect data of the moving image displayed in the normal consumption mode may be thinned and used.

  In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, which is an LCD, is not changed regardless of whether the power consumption mode is the normal power consumption mode or the power saving mode (the power saving mode or the large power saving mode). Although the configuration is adopted, when the power saving mode is set, three 7-segment LEDs corresponding to each of the three symbol rows may be provided, and the symbol variation display may be performed by these 7-segment LEDs. In addition, a shutter member that is normally stored in the center frame 86 and that can be stopped at a position that covers a part or all of the third symbol display device 81 that is an LCD and that appears from the vertical direction during production is provided. If there is, three 7-segment LEDs may be provided in front of the shutter member (a surface visually recognized by the player).

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it installed so that LED which is a light emission means might be irradiated toward a player (namely, it irradiates in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10), for power saving modes, You may provide the light emission means (for example, LED) which orient | assigned the irradiation direction to the direction along the surface of the front frame 14, the lower tray unit 15, or the game board 13. FIG. Since the light emitting means whose irradiation direction is directed along the surface of the game board 13 or the like can illuminate a wide area and brighten it, even a small number of light emitting means can provide sufficient color. Such power-saving mode light-emitting means (that is, light-emitting means whose irradiation direction is directed in the direction along the surface of the game board 13, etc.) is used as main components (for example, the specific winning device 65, the first entrance 64, etc.). ) May be provided. Further, by providing light-emitting means for the power saving mode along the periphery of the game board 13, sufficient color can be provided during the performance even in the power saving mode. In addition, by setting the irradiation direction of the light-emitting means for the power saving mode to a direction along the arrangement direction of the LEDs used in the normal consumption mode (that is, the issuing means that the irradiation direction is irradiated toward the player), With a small number of light-emitting means, it is possible to mimic a shape similar to that formed by a sequence of LEDs used in the normal consumption mode.

  In the first embodiment, for example, among the light emitting means provided on the front frame 14, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are set to the power saving mode (the power saving mode and the large power saving mode). In the power saving mode, the brightness of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 is kept at the normal brightness, and the brightness of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 is reduced or turned off. Good. That is, the luminance of the light emitting means closer to the game area (in this case, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304) is preferentially set to the normal luminance, and the light emitting means away from the game area (in this case, the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310) The brightness may be reduced or turned off. Since the player plays the game while looking at the game area, the consciousness of the light emitting means far from the game area is relatively thin. Therefore, even if the brightness of the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310, which are the light emitting means on the side away from the game area, is reduced or turned off, the player is not much concerned about this, and the interest of the game may be reduced. Low. On the other hand, the player is more conscious of the light emission mode as the light emitting means closer to the game area. Therefore, when the brightness of the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304, which are light emitting means closer to the game area, is reduced, the player feels uncomfortable in the production. It is likely that the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, the brightness of the light emitting means closer to the game area is preferentially set to the normal brightness, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side away from the game area is reduced or turned off so that the player feels in the power saving mode. Reduction can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which aims at the power-saving power consumption by lowering | hanging the brightness | luminance of a light emission means (LED), all the light emission means for effects are light-extinguished and it is on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 The light emission mode of the center frame 86 and the notification lamp 85 may be displayed in a pseudo manner.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which aims at the power-saving of power consumption by reducing the operation amount of the production movable body 361, the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is not operated, but the production movable body 361 is not operated. Alternatively, a display imitating the effect movable body 361 may appear, and the operation of the effect movable body 361 may be displayed in a pseudo manner by moving the display.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although the power saving of the power consumption during a customer waiting effect was not considered, also during a customer waiting effect, for example, the light emission means (LED) similarly to the said 1st Embodiment. It may be configured to save power consumption by performing control such as lowering the brightness. Or similarly to the said 2nd Embodiment, it is good also as a structure which displays the pseudo | simulation image (substitute image) corresponding to a light emission means on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during a customer waiting effect.

  In each of the above embodiments, the power consumption mode is changed based on the operation (pressing) of the power saving button 23 by the player. However, the employee in the hall operates the power saving button 23 for a specific operation (for example, for a length of 5 seconds). Until the specified release operation (for example, turning the power on again) is performed. The power consumption mode that has been set may be configured to be fixed. In addition, a dedicated switch or button that can fix the power consumption mode may be provided on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the effect control device 117).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player is provided. However, the switch that can be operated only by the employee of the hall, not the player, without providing the power saving button 23. A button or a button may be provided so that the employee can change the power consumption mode instead of the player. In this case, for example, by providing a switch or button on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 such as the production control device 117, only the employees in the hall can operate. When the above-described switches and buttons are provided for the production control device 117, if it is also used as a volume operation unit for adjusting the volume of the speaker device 26, it is consumed without additionally installing an operation unit. A configuration in which the power mode can be changed only by an employee can be realized.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player is provided. However, the power saving button 23 is not provided, or in addition to providing the power saving button 23, a predetermined power saving button 23 is provided. The power consumption mode automatically switches from the normal consumption mode to the power saving mode at the timing (for example, the start timing of the customer waiting effect), or can be regarded as a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the game). The power consumption mode may be switched from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode by winning a predetermined winning award, detecting the operation of the operation handle 51, detecting the mode change button 22 or the effect button 53, etc. Good.

  Moreover, in the said 1st-4th embodiment, it was set as the structure which provided the power saving button 23 which a player can operate, but in addition to providing the power saving button 23, only the employee of a hall can operate it instead of a player. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a state in which the player can change the power consumption mode and a state in which the player can switch the power consumption mode can be changed by operating a switch or button.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player is provided. However, the player is not provided with the power saving button 23 or in addition to the power saving button 23 provided. In addition, a switch or button that can be operated only by hall employees is provided, and the hall employee operates the switches and buttons so that the predetermined timing described above (for example, winning a prize at a predetermined prize opening or operation) The operation may be changed between a state in which switching of the power consumption mode by the operation of the handle 51 and the detection of the mode change button 22 and the effect button 53 is permitted and a state in which the power consumption mode is not permitted.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 sets a stop command for instructing the end of the variation display of the third symbol at the end timing of the variation display of the first symbol, and outputs it to the effect control device 117. The presentation control device 117 is configured to end the variation display of the third symbol based on the reception of the stop command. However, the presentation control device 117 uses the variation time counter (not shown) to display the third symbol. It is good also as a structure which manages the execution period of the fluctuation | variation display of a 3rd pattern by measuring fluctuation | variation time.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the value of the special figure reservation ball number N (that is, the number of winning reservations to the first entrance 64) is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display control device 81 (special figure reservation number display section 87). However, a special figure holding lamp which is an LED controlled by the effect control device 117 may be provided, and a number of LEDs corresponding to the value of the special figure holding ball number N may be turned on. Further, the special figure reservation number display part 87 represents the value of the special figure reservation ball number N by a number, or a mode (for example, color or lighting) that is different from the four divided areas by the number of reservations. (Pattern) may be displayed. Further, the number of winnings held in the first entrance 64 may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the display by the special figure reservation number display unit 87 or the special figure reservation lamp may not be performed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a winning to the 1st entrance 64 and the passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is different for the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or by dividing the number of four divided areas by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. You may do it.

  In the second embodiment, the fourth image layer on which the pseudo image is formed is overlapped with the third image pattern by superimposing the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying the variation and effect of the design. Although it is configured to display on the display device 81, the display contents (design variations, effects, etc.) formed on the first to third image layers can be displayed inside the display areas of the display units 441 to 445. You may reduce it.

  In the second embodiment, the fifth image layer on which the pseudo image (pseudo image 451) is formed is overlaid on the image layers (first to third image layers) for displaying the variation and effect of the design. Although it was set as the structure displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 by this, exclusive fluctuation | variation display data and effect data including a pseudo image are prepared, and it simulates in any image layer among the 1st-3rd image layers. By forming an image including an image, the pseudo image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using the fifth image layer.

  In the second embodiment, the special figure reservation number display unit 87 is displayed at a position that does not overlap the display units 441 to 445, thereby displaying the special figure reservation number display unit 87 when displaying a pseudo image. However, when the pseudo image is displayed, the display position of the special figure reservation number display unit 87 may be changed.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, although each display part 441-445 was arrange | positioned so that the outer periphery of the visual recognition area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 might be enclosed in 1 row, the display part which can display a pseudo image is 2 It may be arranged side by side or more.

  In the second embodiment, the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441 is an area for displaying a pseudo image corresponding to the decoration LEDs 341 and 342, and the pseudo side lamp display unit 442 is a pseudo display corresponding to the side LEDs 343 to 345. There are LEDs that do not consider a pseudo image (substitute image) among the LEDs that are used as an area for displaying an image, that is, the LEDs that are turned off in the power saving mode, such as the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310. Instead, a pseudo image displayed on the pseudo decoration lamp display unit 441, the pseudo side lamp display unit 442, or the like may be displayed in a display mode that considers all LEDs that are turned off in the power saving mode.

  In the third, fourth, sixth and seventh embodiments, the shutter member 180 appears from the left side of the opening 86a of the center frame 86 and covers the left side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81. The shutter member 180 is composed of two shutter members, a member 180L and a right shutter member 180R that appears from the right side of the opening 86a and covers the right side of the visual recognition area of the third symbol display device 81. You may be comprised from the two shutter members which respectively appear from the upper side and lower side of the opening 86a. Alternatively, the shutter member may be a single shutter member that appears from one side of the opening 86 a of the center frame 86.

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is arranged on the front side of the shutter member 180 that is used exclusively in the power saving mode. When a shutter member is provided for this purpose, the power-saving symbol display device 181 may be arranged on the effect shutter member. In addition, the shutter member 180 provided with the power saving symbol display device 181 may be a shutter member used exclusively in the power saving mode, and a shutter member for production may be provided on the front side or the back side.

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180 and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode, but is exposed only in the power saving mode. However, the power saving symbol display device 181 may be disposed on the game board 13 at a position where it can be exposed at all times. In the case of adopting such a configuration, in the power saving mode, a shutter member such as the shutter member 180 may be provided so as to cover the 3rd symbol display device 81 that has been turned off.

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the power saving symbol display device 181 is disposed on the front side of the shutter member 180 and is not exposed in the normal consumption mode, but is exposed only in the power saving mode. Although it is configured, the power-saving symbol display device 181 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, a predetermined position near the operation handle 51 on the front side of the front frame 14 (the side that is viewed when the player plays). It is good also as a structure arrange | positioned. In such a case, in the normal consumption mode, a 7-segment LED that performs other functions such as a rendering function may be used as the power saving symbol display device 181.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display of the power saving symbol display device 181 is performed with the shutter member 180 kept closed until the return waiting time elapses. However, if the game board 13 or the front frame 14 is provided with a 7-segment LED that can be viewed at all times, the return waiting time is reduced when the power saving mode is switched to the normal consumption mode. Without waiting for the progress, the power-saving symbol display device 181 is turned off, the shutter member 180 is opened, and a display using a 7-segment LED provided on the game board 13 or the front frame 14 so as to be always visible is configured. May be.

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the power-saving symbol display device 181 is composed of the three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c arranged in the vertical direction. In some cases, three 7-segment LEDs 181a to 181c may be arranged in the left-right direction. Also, nine 7-segment LEDs may be provided in 3 rows × 3 stages.

  In the third, fourth, sixth and seventh embodiments, the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R are provided with the notches 180La and 180Ra, respectively. However, the notches such as the notches 180La and 180Ra are not provided. It is sufficient that at least one of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R is provided.

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the notches 180La and 180Ra are provided at the ends of the left and right shutter members 180L and 180R on the closing movement direction side. The position where the cutout portion is provided is not particularly limited as long as the screen can face the screen of the symbol display device 81. Further, the notch may be formed by notching the ends of the shutter members 180L and 180R like the notches 180La and 180Ra, or may be notched as a hole in the shutter members 180L and 180R. May be. Further, the number of notches is not particularly limited, and for example, four holes may be formed as notches near the four corners of the opening 86a.

  In the third, fourth, sixth and seventh embodiments, the power saving symbol display control process (S3101) is executed every 20 ms in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117. However, it may be configured to execute every 1 ms as in the power consumption mode setting process (S1101).

  In the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh embodiments, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are set to medium luminance and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are turned off in the power saving mode. ˜304 and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 need only be lower in luminance than the normal consumption mode, and the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 may have higher luminance than the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310.

  In the fourth embodiment, the use of the power saving symbol display device 181 is started when the display area 81a reaches a predetermined size. However, the use of the power saving symbol display device 181 is not used. The start timing is not particularly limited as long as it is a predetermined timing after the power saving mode is set by operating the power saving button 23.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, the display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced, and the area 81b outside the display area 81a is enlarged as an area lit in a predetermined color. did. Instead, the third symbol display device 81 is not an LCD but an electroluminescence display (hereinafter referred to as “ELD”), and the display region 81a of the third symbol display device 81 is gradually reduced and the display region is displayed. You may comprise so that the area | region 81b outside 81a may be expanded as a light-extinguished area. The ELD may be an organic ELD or an inorganic ELD. Since the region 81b is a lighted region, power consumption can be further suppressed.

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off to save power, while the image controller (VDP) ) The power supply to the 274 is not cut off, so that the display state on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be quickly restored when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode after that. did. Instead, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned off, and the power supply to the image controller (VDP) 274 is cut off (turned off). ) To further save power. In this case, it is preferable to switch from the power saving symbol display device 181 to the third symbol display device 81 after the display state of the third symbol display device 81 is in a normally operating state. .

  In the third and fourth embodiments, when the power consumption mode is set to the power saving mode, the power saving symbol display device 181 is configured to display the symbol. The light guide plate display device is provided so as to overlap the front of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and information such as “power saving” is fixedly displayed on the light guide plate display device during the waiting time effect. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a horizontal direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, a firing command indicating that a sphere is to be fired (ball firing instruction has been given) is output from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113. However, when an operation for launching is performed on the operation handle 51, a signal is output from the operation handle 51 to the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp is output. The control device 113 may be configured to recognize that a sphere is launched by this signal. Alternatively, the launch control device 112 outputs a signal or command indicating that control for launching the ball has been performed to the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113, and the effect control device 117 or the sound lamp control device 113 It may be configured to recognize that a sphere is fired by a signal or a command.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the main control device 110 outputs a firing control signal to the firing control device 112, a configuration is used to output a customer waiting effect cancellation command to the sound lamp control device 113. The structure which does not output a customer waiting production cancellation | release command from 110 may be sufficient. In such a case, when the operation handle 51 is operated for launching, the operation handle 51 is configured to output a signal to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the signal according to this signal. It is good also as a structure which recognizes that a ball | bowl is launched and cancels a customer waiting | waiting effect. Alternatively, the launch control device 112 is configured to output a signal or command indicating that control for launching the ball has been performed to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 launches the ball by this signal. It is good also as a structure which recognizes this and cancels a customer waiting | waiting effect. In these cases, as in the seventh embodiment, main controller 110 may recognize the cancellation of the customer waiting effect based on the launch permission signal, or may perform the customer waiting effect from voice lamp control device 113. It may be configured to receive a command indicating that it has been canceled, and the cancellation of the customer waiting effect may be recognized by receiving such a command.

  In the fifth embodiment, the power saving mode 23 that can be operated by the player can be used to set the power consumption mode during the game, and the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be used to wait for the customer. The power saving specifications (whether or not power saving) can be switched. Instead of this, the volume adjustment switch 227 may be configured not only to save power during the customer waiting effect but also to set the power consumption mode during the game. In other words, the power consumption mode may be set by the volume adjustment switch 227, and the power saving specification during the customer waiting effect may be determined according to the set power consumption mode. For example, the output value from the volume adjustment switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) is divided into three parts, which are assigned to the normal consumption mode, the power saving mode, and the large power saving mode, respectively, and are included in the normal consumption mode by the volume adjustment switch 227. If the output value is set, the power saving during the customer waiting effect is not performed. On the other hand, if the output value included in the power saving mode or the power saving mode is set, the customer waiting effect during the customer waiting effect is set. Configure to save power. As described above, when the power consumption mode during the game can be set by both the power saving button 23 and the volume adjustment switch 227, the setting by the power saving button 23 or the volume adjustment switch 227 may be given priority. .

  Alternatively, the power saving button 23 that can be operated by the player is omitted, and the power consumption mode during the game is set by the volume adjustment switch 227 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and operated by the employee of the hall instead of the player. It is also possible to set both the power saving specifications during the customer waiting effect.

  In the fifth embodiment, the normal specification and the power saving specification are switched using the volume adjustment switch 227 which is an operator for adjusting the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker device 226. However, it is possible to switch between the normal specification and the power saving specification by using a switch for adjusting the brightness of various light emitting means such as LEDs and a switch for adjusting the amount of operation of the movable body for production (for example, the movable body for production 361). It is good also as a structure to perform. In this case as well, the brightness of the light emitting means and the operation of the movable movable body for presentation can be achieved by operating only one switch (such as a switch for adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means or a switch for adjusting the operation amount of the movable body for presentation). Both amount adjustment and switching between the normal specification and the power saving specification can be performed. Similarly to the fifth embodiment, the player can play a suitable game with a sound volume suitable for the situation while saving power. Can be provided.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, when it switches to power-saving specification, the structure which light-emitting means (LED301-310,321-323,341-346) for an effect is extinguished with the start of a customer waiting effect. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting unit for the effect is put on standby for a predetermined period after the start of the customer waiting effect (for example, until one demonstration display in the customer waiting effect ends). When the light-emitting means is turned off with the start of the customer waiting effect, there is a possibility that a dark atmosphere may be suddenly provided. By adopting such a configuration, the generation of such a dark atmosphere can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the said 5th Embodiment, when it switched to power-saving specification, it was set as the structure which light-extinguishes the light emission means (LED301-310,321-323,341-346) for presentation during a customer waiting | waiting effect, In addition, you may comprise so that the brightness | luminance of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may be reduced to the value more than zero during a customer waiting effect.

  In the fifth embodiment, the output value from the volume control switch 227 (rotary switch 227b) to be rotated is divided into two, and each is assigned to the normal specification and the power saving specification. Instead of the switch 227 (the rotary switch 227b), a configuration using a slider type switch capable of outputting a plurality of output values may be used. Or, when a push-on rotary encoder with a push button on the operation knob is used, the output value when operating without pressing the push button is the normal output value, and the operation is performed while pressing the push button. The output value may be a power saving specification output value.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the display control device 114 receives the lighting restart command, the display control device 114 turns on the power of the image controller 236 that is a VDP, and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81. It was set as the structure which performs both lighting up. That is, when the power consumption mode is switched from the power saving mode to the normal power consumption mode, the power of the image controller 236 is turned on and the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 is turned on by one command (lighting restart command). Both of them were configured to be executed. Instead, when the display controller 114 receives a lighting restart command, the display controller 114 only turns on the power of the image controller 236 that is a VDP, and the audio lamp controller 113 sends another command after the return waiting time has elapsed. The display control device 114 may be configured to turn on the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 when the command is received. The lighting of the backlight of the third symbol display device 81 can be delayed, and power consumption can be reduced accordingly.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 being a closed state until return waiting time passes. In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, the display on the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal. It may be configured to forcibly select variation display data of a variation time (for example, a variation time of 30 seconds or more) in consideration of the time required (for example, 20 seconds). By adopting such a configuration, before the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, the variation display of the symbol (and the effect included in the variation display) is finished, and the player It is possible to suppress the display of the change and the production of the game, and to reduce the interest of the game. Note that the change display data of the change time (change pattern) taking into account the time required for the display of the third symbol display device 81 to return to normal may be stored in the character ROM 235 as dedicated data.

  Moreover, in the said 6th Embodiment, it was set as the structure which continues the display of the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving, with the shutter member 180 being a closed state until return waiting time passes. In addition to this, when it is necessary to display the variable display on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the power consumption mode is switched to the normal consumption mode, it should be displayed at the timing when the variable display stops. You may comprise so that a stop symbol may be interrupted and displayed. When the image controller 236 is turned on again, the fluctuation display that has been executed before the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal is displayed halfway, and the player can predict the stop symbol. However, by adopting the above configuration, the display of the third symbol display device 81 returns to normal, and the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. Loss of interest can be suppressed by the variable display displayed at the end.

  In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the third symbol display device 81 is an LCD. However, the third symbol display device 81 may be an ELD. In such a case, not only the ELD is turned off but also the VDP is used. Further power saving may be achieved by cutting off (turning off) the power supply to a certain image controller 274.

  In the seventh embodiment, the power saving button 23 and the effect button 53 are connected to both the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113. However, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the power saving button is used. 23 and the effect button 53 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113 without being connected to the main control device 110. When these buttons 23 and 53 are connected to the sound lamp control device 113 without being connected to the main control device 110, the operation state of the buttons 23 and 53 is read into the sound lamp control device 113 and the read operation is performed. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the command set according to the state may be output to the main controller 110. Alternatively, the power saving button 23 and the effect button 53 may be connected to the main control device 110 without being connected to the sound lamp control device 113. When these buttons 23 and 53 are connected to the main control device 110 without being connected to the sound lamp control device 113, the operation states of the buttons 23 and 53 are read into the main control device 110, and the read operation states are read. A command set in accordance with the above may be configured to be output to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, one of the power saving button 23 and the effect button 53 may be connected to the main control device 110 and the other may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the seventh embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 measures the return waiting time, and outputs the standby period elapsed command to the display control device 117 at the end timing. It is good also as composition which measures progress of return waiting time from the timing which received waiting production cancellation command or lighting resumption command from voice lamp control device 117.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation display is started during the measurement of the return waiting time, the main control device 110 selects the fluctuation pattern for the return at which the fluctuation time is longer than the return waiting time as the fluctuation mode. In addition, a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern for return is output to the sound lamp control device 113. In place of this, when the fluctuation display is started during the measurement of the return waiting time, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation mode selected in the main control device 110 ends before the return waiting time elapses. In this case, the variation time is changed according to a predetermined rule, and a command indicating that the variation time is changed by the main control device 110 is output to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the selected variation pattern command. Also good.

  In such a case, a predetermined location in the normal-time fluctuation display data 235a corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is repeatedly executed or paused while the return waiting time is being measured, so as to match the changed fluctuation time. May be. As a result, the return variation display data 235b can be made unnecessary, so that the memory consumption of the character ROM 235 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation display is started during the measurement of the return waiting time, the main control device 110 selects the fluctuation pattern for the return at which the fluctuation time is longer than the return waiting time as the fluctuation mode. In addition, a variation pattern command indicating the selected variation pattern for return is output to the sound lamp control device 113. In place of this, when the fluctuation display is started during the measurement of the return waiting time, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation mode selected in the main control device 110 ends before the return waiting time elapses. In some cases, for example, the selected variation mode is changed to a variation mode with a longer variation time, such as changing normal variation (out-of-range variation) to normal reach or super reach, or changing normal reach to super reach. You may comprise.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is also being executed even when the predetermined return waiting time ends, the return waiting time In the end timing, the stop symbol at the time of return according to the lottery result related to the jackpot is forcibly displayed. Even when a long variation display is executed, the return stop symbol may be forcibly displayed at the end timing of the return standby time.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display that has been executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is also being executed even when the predetermined return waiting time ends, the return waiting time At the end timing, the stop symbol at the time of return according to the lottery result related to the jackpot is forcibly displayed. Instead, the symbol change display that was being executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is also being executed at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends, and the return waiting time ends. When the period from the timing to the end of the variable display is shorter than a predetermined period, the return stop symbol may be forcibly displayed at the end timing of the return standby time. In this case, the change display of the symbol that was being executed before switching from the power saving mode to the normal consumption mode is also being executed at the timing when the predetermined return waiting time ends, but changes from the timing when the return waiting time ends. When the period until the display is completed is longer than the predetermined period, the return stop symbol is not displayed. When the period from the end of the return waiting time to the end of the variable display is longer than the predetermined period, there is a possibility that the effect that expects the lottery result related to the jackpot is displayed to the extent that the player can expect the jackpot Is expensive. Therefore, in such a case, the player can be given the original interest by the variable display by making the player visually recognize the variable display (variable effect).

  Further, the configurations of the first to seventh embodiments and the respective modifications can be appropriately combined. For example, in the third and fourth embodiments, in the power saving mode, the configuration in which the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are set to medium luminance and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are turned off may be employed in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Good.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  The concept of various inventions included in the gaming machine of the present invention and the various embodiments described above will be shown below.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electrical components that are provided at positions where a player can visually recognize and are driven by electric power, and an effect execution means that executes an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electrical components The game machine A1 further comprises power saving means for reducing power used for an electrical component excluding a specific electrical component among the plurality of electrical components at a predetermined timing.

  According to the gaming machine A1, since the power used for the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component is reduced by the power saving means at a predetermined timing, the power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since certain electrical parts are excluded from the power saving target, the player can play a suitable game while saving power by excluding the electric parts that may cause an inappropriate situation due to power saving. Can be provided.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the gaming machine A1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 20) of the effect control device 117 or the effect movable body control process ( S1107) is exemplified. In the above embodiment, the power saving means of the gaming machine A1 includes S1257 and S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, and the start-up LED lighting control of the first embodiment. S1345 and S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 30) are exemplified.

  The gaming machine A1 includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and the power saving means reduces power used for electrical components excluding the specific electrical component at a timing when the operation means is operated. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the player's needs and that the player is saving power. Can make you feel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine A2.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the power saving means reduces the luminance of at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component, thereby reducing the electrical component excluding the specific electrical component. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that power used is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A3, since the power is reduced (that is, to save power) by lowering the luminance of the electrical components, the player can realize that the player is saving power by changing the appearance. Further, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the luminance of the electric parts, the player can realize that the power is saved even by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the power saving unit removes the specific electrical component by thinning out at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component to emit light. A gaming machine A4 characterized by lowering the electric power used for electric parts.

  According to the gaming machine A4, power is saved by thinning out electrical components and causing light to be emitted, so that the player can realize that power is saved by a change in appearance. In addition, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by thinning out the electrical components and causing the light to be emitted, the player can realize that power is also saved by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the power saving unit removes the specific electrical component by reducing the number of times of light emission of at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that power used for electrical parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electrical parts. Since the atmosphere of the production is switched by reducing the number of times of light emission of the electric parts, the player can realize that the power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the power saving unit removes the specific electrical component by reducing an operation amount of at least a part of the electrical component excluding the specific electrical component. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the electric power used for the electric parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A5, power saving is achieved by reducing the operation amount of the electrical components. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by reducing the operation amount of the electric parts, the player can realize that power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the power saving means removes the specific electrical component by operating at least a part of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that electric power used for electrical parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A7, power is saved by thinning and operating the electrical components. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by operating by thinning out the electrical parts, the player can realize that the power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the power saving means does not operate the electric parts operated by electric power among the electric parts excluding the specific electric parts, thereby removing the specific electric parts. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that power used for parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the power saving is achieved by not operating the electric parts that are operated by the electric power, so that the player can realize that the power is saved by the change in appearance. Further, since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by not operating the electric parts that are operated by the electric power, the player can realize that the power saving is also realized by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the power saving means reduces the volume of sound emitted from at least some of the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component, thereby reducing the specific sound. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the electric power used for the electric parts excluding the electric parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A9, power is saved by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electrical component. Since the atmosphere of the effect is switched by lowering the volume of the sound emitted from the electrical component, the player can realize that the power is saved by the switching.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the power saving unit removes the specific electrical component by thinning out the electrical component that emits sound by electric power among the electrical components excluding the specific electrical component. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that power used for electrical parts is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine A10, power is saved by thinning out electrical components that emit sound with electric power. Since the sound emitted by thinning out the electrical parts that emit sound by electric power is reduced, or the sound image localization is changed and the atmosphere of the production is switched, the player must save power by switching Can be realized.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, there is provided an effect mode setting means for setting one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes, wherein the effect execution means includes an effect mode set by the effect mode setting means, The power saving means includes mode setting control means for preventing a predetermined effect mode from being set by the effect mode setting means among the plurality of effect modes. The power saving means is configured to reduce power used for electrical components excluding the specific electrical component by not causing the mode setting control means to set a predetermined effect mode by the effect mode setting means. A feature of the gaming machine A11.

  According to the gaming machine A11, power is saved by not setting a predetermined performance mode. Therefore, power saving is effectively achieved by not setting a performance mode that uses a large amount of power (that is, high power consumption). be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the effect mode setting means of the gaming machine A11 is exemplified by the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment, and the mode setting control means of the gaming machine A11 is the first embodiment. Examples of S1232 and S1233 executed in the form effect mode counter update process (see FIG. 23) are shown.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a game medium can be passed to a predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the specific electric component is an electric provided at a position where the predetermined part can be suggested. A gaming machine A12 that is a component and is an electrical component that emits light or operates in a predetermined pattern when a special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generating means.

  According to the gaming machine A12, a specific electrical component that is not subject to power saving is an electrical component that can suggest a portion that provides an advantageous state to the player in the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is generated. In such a case, the electrical component emits light or operates in a predetermined pattern. By excluding such electrical parts from power saving, the player can be surely recognized that it is in a special gaming state, and the joy and fun that the player feels when in a special gaming state. Can be prevented.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine A12 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special game state generation means of the gaming machine A12 is exemplified by the occurrence of a big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. .

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a game medium can be passed to a predetermined part when the first result is selected by the lottery means And a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than in the normal state, and the specific electrical component reports the result selected by the lottery means to the player. A gaming machine A13, which is an electrical component for making

  According to the gaming machine A13, a specific electrical component that is not subject to power saving is used as an electrical component for reporting the result selected by the lottery means to the player. By excluding such electrical components from power saving, the player can surely see the results related to his profits and can prevent the player from having distrust or dissatisfaction with the lottery. .

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine A13 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine A13 is exemplified by the jackpot generation by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A13, the specific electrical component is an electrical component for notifying an error that has occurred in the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine A14, a specific electrical component that is not subject to power saving is an electrical component for notifying an error. By excluding such electrical components from power saving, it is possible to reliably report various errors occurring in the gaming machine to the player or the employee of the hall. Can be quickly returned to the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, the specific electrical component is an electrical component for displaying a moving image constituting an effect executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine A15, a specific electrical component that is not subject to power saving is an electrical component for displaying a moving image that constitutes an effect executed by the effect executing means. Since the video that constitutes the effect executed by the effect execution means can make the player recognize the effect most effectively, by excluding the electric parts for displaying such an animation from the target of power saving, Even if the electric power used for some of the electrical components is reduced, it is possible to maintain the fun of the production.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A15, when power used for electrical parts excluding the specific electrical part is reduced by the power saving means, a notification means for notifying the fact is provided. A gaming machine A16.

  According to the gaming machine A16, when the power used for the electrical parts excluding the specific electrical parts is reduced by the power saving means, the fact is notified by the notification means, so that the player is saving power. Can be realized.

  A gaming machine A17 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A16, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electrical components that are provided at positions where a player can visually recognize and are driven by electric power, and an effect execution means that executes an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electrical components And a power-saving means for reducing power used for the predetermined electrical component among the plurality of electrical components at a predetermined timing, wherein the plurality of electrical components are for performance performed by the performance execution means. Including a first electric component having a display screen capable of displaying a moving image or a still image, and a second electric component which is an electric component different from the first electric component and which is the predetermined electric component. The power saving means includes: a power consumption reducing means for reducing the power used for the second electrical component; and the second electrical component in which the power used is reduced by the power consumption reducing means. And a substitute image display means for displaying a substitute image as a substitute for the game member in a display mode according to the operation of the game member together with a moving image or a still image for presentation on the display screen of the first electrical component. A gaming machine B1 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the substitute image as a substitute for the gaming member having the second electric component in which the power used is reduced by the power reduction means is displayed by the substitute image display means according to the effect by the effect executing means. In the aspect, since it is displayed on the first electric component together with the moving image or the still image for production, information that can be enjoyed by the player when the power to be used is reduced (information related to expectation and change in gaming state) Information) and visual effects (for example, production effects) can be suppressed. At this time, since the first electric component for displaying the moving image or the still image for presentation is used as the electric component for displaying the substitute image, the power used for the second electric component is reduced by the power. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced (power saving) by the amount reduced. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  The “operation (of the second electrical component)” in the gaming machine B1 is intended to include various operations such as light emission, movement or rotation in a predetermined direction, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the gaming machine B1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) of the effect control device 117 or the effect movable body control process (S1107). Is exemplified. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a 1st electrical component of gaming machine B1, and LED 341-348 and movable body for production are shown as a 2nd electrical component of gaming machine B1. 361 is exemplified.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a power-saving means of game machine B1, S2253, S1258 performed in the lamp output process (refer FIG. 38) of 2nd Embodiment, or starting-port LED lighting control of 2nd Embodiment Examples include S1346 executed in the process (see FIG. 40) and the pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39). In the above embodiment, the power consumption reducing means of the gaming machine B1 includes S2253 and S1258 executed in the lamp output process (see FIG. 38) of the second embodiment, and the start port LED of the second embodiment. S1346 executed in the lighting control process (see FIG. 40) is exemplified, and a pseudo lamp display process (see FIG. 39) is exemplified as the alternative image display means of the gaming machine B1.

  In the gaming machine B1, the substitute image display means uses, as the substitute image, the substitute image as a substitute image for the gaming member having the second electric component whose power used by the used power reduction means is reduced. The game machine B2 is displayed on the display screen in a display mode simulating

  According to the gaming machine B2, a substitute image as a substitute for a gaming member having a second electrical component that is driven and operated by electric power is displayed on the display screen (first screen) by a substitute image display unit in a display mode simulating the operation. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress a reduction in visual effects such as a rendering effect associated with a reduction in power used for the second electrical component.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the substitute image display means displays the substitute image on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area visible to the player on the display screen of the first electric component. B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the substitute image is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the visual recognition area visible to the player on the display screen of the first electrical component, so that the effect displayed on the display screen of the first electrical component. It is possible to prevent the visibility of a moving image or a still image for use from being deteriorated due to the display of a substitute image. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of various inconveniences such as a decrease in visual effect (for example, a decrease in rendering effect) due to a decrease in the visibility of a moving image or still image for rendering.

  In the gaming machine B3, the substitute image display means is the second electric component whose power to be used is reduced by the power consumption reducing means, and is arranged around the display screen of the first electric component. A substitute image as a substitute for a gaming member having a second electrical component that is driven by electric power to emit light is displayed as a substitute image at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the gaming component that is the target of the substitute image. A gaming machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, the power used for the substitute image displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen (the display screen of the first electrical component) by the substitute image display means is reduced by the power consumption reducing means. A substitute image for a game member having a second electrical component that is arranged around the display screen and has a second electrical component that emits light by electric power, and is a target of the substitute image It is displayed at a position corresponding to the arrangement of the members. Therefore, since the visual effect (for example, effect) by the light emission of the second electrical component included in the game member that is the target of the substitute image can be effectively simulated by the substitute image, the electric power used for the second electrical component It is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in visual effect due to a decrease in.

  In the gaming machine B4, the second electrical component disposed around the display screen of the first electrical component emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the effect executed by the effect executing means. Characteristic gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the second electric component that emits light in a light emission mode according to the effect executed by the effect executing means, the second electric component disposed around the display screen of the first electric component. The substitute image as a substitute for the game member having the electrical component is displayed on the outer peripheral side of the display area of the display screen by the substitute image display means in an arrangement according to the arrangement of the game member to be the substitute image. Therefore, it is possible to effectively simulate the effect produced by the light emission of the second electrical component included in the game member that is the target of the substitute image, using the substitute image, and it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction in the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, when a start condition is satisfied, a lottery means for performing a lottery and a special advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means A special gaming state generating means for generating a gaming state, wherein the second electrical component emits light during a special gaming state generated by the special gaming state generating means. Machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the substitute image as a substitute for the gaming member having the second electrical component that emits light during the special gaming state generated by the special gaming state generating means is displayed on the display screen of the first electrical component. Therefore, even if the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by the power consumption reduction means, the player can be sure that the player is in a special gaming state that is an advantageous gaming state. Can be communicated to. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the joy and fun of being in the special gaming state before and after the power saving by the power saving means, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by the occurrence of a big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. .

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, when a start condition is established, a lottery means for performing a lottery and a special advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery by the lottery means A gaming machine B7, comprising: special gaming state generating means for generating a gaming state, wherein the second electrical component emits light when the starting condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B7, since the substitute image as a substitute for the gaming member having the second electrical component that emits light when the start condition is satisfied is displayed on the display screen of the first electrical component, the second Even if the electric power used for the electric parts is reduced by the used electric power reducing means, it can be surely transmitted to the player that the starting condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation that a predetermined result (result that the special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generating unit) may be selected by lottery by the lottery unit before and after power saving by the power saving unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by the power saving by the power saving means.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine B7 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine B7 is exemplified by the occurrence of a big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. .

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the substitute image display means displays the substitute image in the predetermined direction by being driven by electric power, which is the second electric component included in the gaming member corresponding to the substitute image. A gaming machine B8, which is displayed on the display screen as a moving image of movement according to movement of a moving or rotating gaming member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, a moving image according to the movement of a gaming member that is driven by electric power and moves or rotates in a predetermined direction is displayed as a substitute image by the substitute image display means. Therefore, since the feature of the operation of the gaming member can be suitably represented by the substitute image, it is possible to effectively suppress the reduction of the visual effect (for example, the production effect) accompanying the reduction of the power used for the second electrical component. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the substitute image display unit forms an image layer that is different from an image layer that includes the substitute image, an image layer that includes the moving image or still image for presentation, and And display control means for displaying the image layer including the substitute image formed by the substitute image layer forming means on the image layer including the moving image or the still image for presentation. A gaming machine B9 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the substitute image is displayed by superimposing the image layer including the substitute image formed by the substitute image layer forming unit and the image layer including the moving image or the still image for production on the display control unit. By doing so, it is displayed on the display screen of the first electrical component. Therefore, for example, in order to display the substitute image on the outer peripheral side of the display screen of the first electrical component, there is no need to reduce the moving image or still image for presentation, and the control load increases with the increase of the substitute image. It can suppress suitably. Also, there is no need to prepare presentation images (moving images, still images) including substitute images separately from the presentation images used when power saving is not performed by the power saving means, thus reducing the consumption of storage capacity. it can.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, a notification image display means for displaying a notification image for notifying predetermined information at a position that does not overlap with the substitute image on the display screen of the first electrical component is provided. A gaming machine B10 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B10, the substitute image is displayed by the substitute image display means at a position where the notification image for notifying the predetermined information does not overlap the substitute image on the display screen of the first electric component. Therefore, regardless of whether or not to save power, the control of the notification image can be diverted, the visibility of necessary information (predetermined information) can be ensured, and the predetermined information indicated by the notification image can be obtained. Can be reliably transmitted to the player.

  The “predetermined information” in the gaming machine B10 is intended to include, for example, the value of the special figure holding ball number N, the stop symbol, the notice character display, and the like.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, an operating means operable by a player is provided, and the power saving means reduces power used for the predetermined electrical component at a timing when the operating means is operated. A gaming machine B11 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B11, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to save power as required by the player, and that the player is saving power. Can make you feel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine B11.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the substitute image display means displays the substitute image on the display screen corresponding to an arrangement position of the game member with respect to the first electric component. A gaming machine B12 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B12, the substitute image is displayed on the display screen corresponding to the arrangement position of the game member with reference to the first electric component, so that the correspondence relationship between the game member and the substitute image is indicated by the player. It is easy to understand, and the player can surely obtain the information given from the second electric component from the substitute image.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the gaming member moves so as to overlap the display screen of the first electrical component, and the substitute image display means places the substitute image on the display screen. A gaming machine B13, which is displayed on the display screen as a moving image representing the gaming members moving so as to overlap each other.

  According to the gaming machine B13, the power saving effect can be enhanced by not operating the gaming member, and the amount of information regarding the sense of expectation given by the operation of the gaming member is not reduced, and the visual effect as an effect is not reduced. .

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine B15 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means, the display means includes a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. The display means used for displaying the stop symbol at a predetermined timing from the first display means to the second display means. A gaming machine C1 comprising a power saving means for switching.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the second power consumption is lower than the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving).

  In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine C1, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to provide a player with a suitable game in which the above-described inconveniences are suitably prevented while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified by the jackpot generation by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. . Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a 1st display means of the gaming machine C1, and the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving is illustrated as a 2nd display means of the gaming machine C1. The Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a power-saving means of the gaming machine C1, the power-saving symbol display control process of the third and fourth embodiments (see FIGS. 48 and 42), and the power-saving mode transition process of the third and fourth embodiments ( The process of S3432 executed in FIG. 49 and FIG. 53) is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first display means has a display screen for displaying the stop symbol as an image, and the gaming machine uses the display means used for displaying the stop symbol. In the case of the display means, the display screen is stored so as to be visible, and when the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched by the power saving means, the front side of the display screen In the state where the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and the front side member is arranged on the front side of the display screen. A gaming machine C2 that is exposed so as to be visible.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the second display means is provided on the front side of the front side member, and is exposed so as to be visible in a state where the front side member is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the display screen. On the other hand, when the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by the power saving means, the stored front side member is placed on the front side of the display screen. Since they are arranged in an overlapping manner, the stop symbol can be displayed on the second display means while the display screen of the first display means is hidden by the front side member. Therefore, while suppressing the deterioration of the impression due to the stop symbol not being displayed on the display screen of the first display means (for example, the deterioration of the impression due to the darkness of the display screen), the power consumption is smaller. Since the stop symbol can be displayed on the display means 2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game while saving power.

  In the embodiment, the shutter member 180 (180L, 180R) is exemplified as the front side member of the gaming machine C2.

  In the gaming machine C2, the front-side member has a notch or a hole through which the display screen can be visually recognized when placed on the front side of the display screen. C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the front-side member has a notch or a hole that allows the display screen to be visually recognized when arranged on the front side of the display screen (display screen of the first display means). Therefore, the player can confirm that the stop symbol is not displayed on the display screen through the notch or hole (for example, the display screen is dark). Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that power is being saved from the state of the display screen confirmed through the notch or hole.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the power saving means is displayed on the first display means when the first display means is used as a display means for displaying the stop symbol. The first display means displays the display corresponding to the display content on the second display means, and after the display by the first means, the first display means is displayed by the stop symbol. And a second means for erasing display contents displayed on the first display means in an impossible state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, after the display corresponding to the display content displayed on the first display means is also displayed on the second display means by the first means, The display content displayed on the first display means is deleted. That is, after displaying the same content on both the first display means and the second display means, the display means used to display the stop symbol is changed from the first display means to the second display. Switch to means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display content such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means are unquestionable and legitimate. It is possible to suitably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the above embodiment, the first means of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified by the power saving symbol display control process (see FIGS. 48 and 52) of the third and fourth embodiments, and the second of the gaming machine C1. As a means, the process of S3432 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C4, an area other than the display area on the display screen according to the display area reduction means for gradually reducing the display area on the first display means and the reduction of the display area by the display area reduction means And front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side member so as to increase the overlap with the front side member, wherein the first means is configured such that the display area is predetermined by the display area reduction means. Or when the overlap between the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member reaches a predetermined size by the front side member control means, the first A gaming machine C5, wherein a display corresponding to the display content displayed on the display means is also displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and in accordance with the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Since the overlap is increased by the front side member control means, switching of the display means by the power saving means can be impressed to the player, and the player can realize that power saving is being performed.

  In the above embodiment, the display area reduction means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments. The front side member control means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by the processing of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition processing (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments.

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, a display area reduction means for gradually reducing the display area on the first display means, and a display area other than the display area on the display screen according to the reduction of the display area by the display area reduction means And the front side member control means for controlling the movement of the front side member so as to increase the overlap between the front side member and the front side member, and when the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is displayed in the first display. And / or a symbol display control means for displaying on the display means a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means after being displayed on the second display means, and the second means comprises: The display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member overlaps the front surface. If the symbol display is displayed on the first display means and / or the second display means by the symbol display control means when the predetermined size is reached by the member control means, After the symbol change display, after the stop symbol is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit by the symbol display control unit, the stop symbol displayed on the first display unit is deleted. A gaming machine C6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the display area of the display screen of the first display means is gradually reduced by the display area reduction means, and in accordance with the reduction, the area other than the display area on the display screen and the front side member Is increased by the front side member control means, so that the player can be impressed by the switching of the display means by the power saving means, and the player can feel that he / she is cooperating with power saving.

  Further, the display area is reduced to a predetermined size by the display area reduction means, or the overlap between the area other than the display area and the front side member on the display screen reaches the predetermined size by the front side member control means. In this case, when the symbol change display is displayed on the first display means and / or the second display means by the symbol display control means, the stop symbol is displayed by the symbol display control means after the symbol change display. After being displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the stop symbol displayed on the first display means is erased by the second means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the display content such as the stop symbol displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means are unquestionable and legitimate. It is possible to suitably prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the above embodiment, the display area reduction means of the gaming machine C6 is exemplified by the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments. As the front side member control means of the gaming machine C6, the process of S3423 executed in the power saving mode transition process (see FIGS. 49 and 53) of the third and fourth embodiments is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a first electrical component that is provided around the gaming area in which the first display means is disposed and that is driven by electric power to emit light, and the first electrical component A second electric component that is provided on the outer peripheral side and emits light when driven by electric power, and the power saving means reduces the electric power used for the first electric component by a predetermined level at the predetermined timing. At the same time, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level larger than the predetermined level.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the first electrical component provided around the gaming area in which the first display means is disposed, and the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side from the first electrical component. Since the power to be used is reduced by the power saving means, it is possible to suppress power consumption (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level greater than the predetermined level, so the first display means is provided. The luminance and operation amount of the first electric component provided around the gaming area can be made larger than the luminance and operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Since the first display means on which the stop symbol is displayed is an area that the player pays attention to, the luminance and operation amount of the first electric component arranged at a position closer to the game area is set as the second electric component. By making it larger than the above, the deterioration of the impression accompanying the suppression of power consumption by the power saving means (power saving) (for example, the game area with the switching from the first display means to the second display means with low power consumption) That the bright impression is lost) can be suppressed, and thereby the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, the inner peripheral LEDs 301 to 304 are exemplified as the first electric components of the gaming machine C7, and the outer peripheral LEDs 305 to 310 are exemplified as the second electric components of the gaming machine C7. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S3252 and S3253 performed in the lamp output process (refer FIG. 47) of 3rd, 4th embodiment is illustrated as a power-saving means of the gaming machine C7.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, an operating means operable by a player is provided, and the power saving means includes a display means used for displaying the stop symbol at a timing when the operating means is operated. A gaming machine C8 that switches from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the player's needs and that the player is saving power. Can make you feel.

  In the embodiment described above, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C8.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state where the second display means is overlapped with the front side of the first display means. .

  According to the gaming machine C9, since the position for displaying the stop symbol does not change, the player can easily move the viewing position even if the display unit is switched by the power saving unit.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a front side member operable to switch between a state overlapping the first display means and a state exposing the first display means, and the second display means includes the front face The second display means is housed in a state where the display means provided on the side member is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A gaming machine C10.

  According to the gaming machine C10, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the unused second display means is accommodated and hidden. The person does not care unnecessarily.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the first display means includes an image forming light emitting means for forming an image on a screen, and the power saving means turns off the image forming light emitting means, A gaming machine characterized in that the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by executing display by the second display means. C11.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the power saving means turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means, and executes the display by the second display means, thereby displaying the stop symbol. Is switched from the first display means to the second display means. Therefore, since the first display unit can be restored by turning on the image forming light emitting unit again, the display unit used for displaying the stop symbol is changed from the second display unit to the first display unit. When switching to (1) again, the switching can be completed early. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the display of an effect portion that gives interest to the game at the timing of switching, and thus it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered without being able to see the effect portion.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10 includes display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means, and the first display means forms an image on the screen. And the power saving means shuts off the power by cutting off the power to the display control means, turning off the image forming light emitting means, and executing display by the second display means. A gaming machine C12, wherein a display means used for displaying a symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine C12, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light-emitting means of the first display means, but also supplies power to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to further save power by cutting off the power to the display control means.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine C14 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A gaming machine provided with a plurality of electrical components that are provided at positions where a player can visually recognize and are driven by electric power, and an effect execution means that executes an effect according to the gaming state using a part of the plurality of electrical components The plurality of electrical components are configured to include a first electrical component provided around the gaming area and a second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electrical component, and the gaming machine Reduces the power used for the first electrical component among the plurality of electrical components by a predetermined level at a predetermined timing, and reduces the power used for the second electrical component to a level greater than the predetermined level. A gaming machine D1 including a power saving means for reducing the power consumption only.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the power used by the first electrical component provided around the gaming area and the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electrical component is reduced by the power saving means. Therefore, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). At this time, the power used for the first electrical component is reduced by a predetermined level, and the power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level larger than the predetermined level. The luminance and the operation amount of the electric component can be made larger than the luminance and the operation amount of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side from the first electric component. Since the game area is an area that the player pays attention to, the luminance and operation amount of the first electric component arranged closer to the game area is larger than that of the second electric component, thereby saving power. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression (for example, the absence of a bright impression in the game area) due to the suppression of power consumption (power saving) by the means, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect execution means of the gaming machine D1, the display effect means (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 45) of the effect control device 117 or the effect movable body control process ( S1107) is exemplified. Moreover, in the said embodiment, inner peripheral LED301-304 is illustrated as a 1st electrical component of gaming machine D1, and outer periphery LED305-310 is illustrated as a 2nd electrical component of gaming machine D1. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S3252 and S3253 performed in the lamp output process (refer FIG. 47) of 3rd, 4th embodiment is illustrated as a power-saving means of the gaming machine D1.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first electrical component and the second electrical component are electrical components that emit light when driven by electric power.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the power saving means reduces the power used for the first electrical component by a predetermined level and the power used for the second electrical component by a level greater than the predetermined level. The brightness of the first electrical component provided around the region is higher than the brightness of the second electrical component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electrical component. Therefore, it is possible to relatively brighten the periphery of the game area that the player pays attention to, and to prevent the game area from having a bright impression due to power saving by the power saving means.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first electrical component and the second electrical component are electrical components that emit light in a light emitting mode according to the effect executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, since the first electrical component and the second electrical component are electrical components that emit light in a light emission mode according to the performance executed by the performance execution means, they are provided around the gaming area. The luminance effect of the first electric component, which is easy for the player to be aware of, is higher than the luminance of the second electric component provided on the outer peripheral side of the first electric component. Can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an operation means operable by a player is provided, and the power saving means is the first electric component among the plurality of electric components at a timing when the operation means is operated. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the electric power used for the second electric component is reduced by a predetermined level and the electric power used for the second electrical component is reduced by a level larger than the predetermined level.

  According to the gaming machine D4, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to save power according to the player's needs and that the player is saving power. Can make you feel.

  In the above-described embodiment, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine D4.

  One of the gaming machines D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  In a gaming machine equipped with electric parts for performance driven by electric power, it is manually operated and a normal mode, and a power saving mode in which power consumption is reduced compared to the normal mode when a game is not being executed by the player A mode setting means capable of setting the mode to any one of the above, a determination means for determining whether or not a game is being executed by the player, a power saving mode is set by the mode setting means, and a game by the determination means Power saving means for reducing power used for at least a part of the electrical parts for production when it is determined that the mode setting means is not executed, and the mode setting means each of the normal mode and the power saving mode The game machine E1 is configured to be capable of adjusting an output amount of a predetermined electrical component among a plurality of electrical components for production in a plurality of stages.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means capable of setting either the normal mode or the power saving mode, and the determination means determines that the game is not being executed, Since the electric power used for at least a part of the electric parts is reduced by the power saving means, the power consumption can be suppressed (power saving) when the game is not being executed. In addition, power saving by the power saving means is limited to the case where the power saving mode is set by the mode setting means that is manually operated. Therefore, whether or not to save power when the game is not executed is switched as necessary. be able to.

  Furthermore, the mode setting means is configured to be able to adjust the output amount of a predetermined electrical component among the electrical components for presentation in a plurality of stages for each of the normal mode and the power saving mode. In addition, as output amount by the electrical component for predetermined | prescribed effects, the volume which is the output amount from the electrical component (for example, speaker apparatus) which can output a sound, for example, the electrical component for effects which can be light-emitted For example, the brightness, which is the output amount in the light emitting means such as an LED, and the operation amount, which is the output amount of an electrical component for production (for example, a movable body for production) are included. That is, the output amount by the predetermined electrical component can be adjusted to an amount suitable for the game by the mode setting means. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In addition, when the output amount of a predetermined electrical component is lowered, the amount of power consumed by the electrical component can also be reduced. Therefore, switching whether or not to save power when a game is not being executed, Adjustment of the power consumption of the electrical parts for production can be realized by one mode setting means, and the work for making these settings can be facilitated and the work load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the volume adjustment switch 227 is exemplified as the mode setting means of the gaming machine E1. In the above embodiment, the determination unit of the gaming machine E1 is exemplified by the process of S314 executed in the variation process (see FIG. 13). The power saving unit of the gaming machine E1 is the same as that of the fifth embodiment. The process of S5252 and S5253 performed in a lamp output process (refer FIG. 62) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine E1, the mode setting means is configured to be capable of rotating operation, and can sequentially change a plurality of output values in accordance with the rotating operation, and when rotated in a predetermined direction, the output value When the maximum value is reached and the maximum value is reached, the output shifts to the minimum value. When rotated in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the output value is sequentially decreased and the minimum value is reached and then the maximum value is reached. The normal mode is assigned to a plurality of consecutive output values among the plurality of output values, and the power saving mode is assigned to the remaining plurality of output values. The gaming machine includes conversion means for converting an output value from the mode setting means into an output amount by the predetermined electrical component, and the conversion means has a plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means. Direction The output amount by the predetermined electrical component is reduced after increasing to the maximum value, and is converted so as to increase toward the maximum value after reaching the minimum value. The maximum value is assigned to at least one output value of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. The minimum value of the output amount is an output value assigned to the normal mode and is assigned to a third output value different from the first output value and to the power saving mode adjacent to the third output value. The gaming machine E2 is assigned to at least one output value of a fourth output different from the second output value.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the output value from the mode setting unit is converted into an output amount by a predetermined electric component by the conversion unit. In the conversion by the conversion means, as the plurality of output values that can be output from the mode setting means change in one direction, the output amount by the predetermined electrical component decreases after increasing to the maximum value and reaches the minimum value. After that, it is converted to increase toward the maximum value. At this time, the maximum value of the output amount is at least one of the first output value assigned to the normal mode and the second output value assigned to the power saving mode adjacent to the first output value. The minimum value of the output amount assigned to the value is an output value assigned to the normal mode, and is adjacent to the third output value, which is different from the first output value. The output value assigned to the power saving mode is assigned to at least one of the fourth output values different from the second output value. Therefore, even when the mode setting means is rotated, the output amount by a predetermined electrical component (for example, the volume of sound emitted from the speaker device) is prevented from suddenly increasing or decreasing. it can.

  In the above embodiment, the conversion means of the gaming machine E2 is executed in a volume setting value table (not shown) stored in the ROM 272 (see FIG. 55 (b)) and a volume setting process (see FIG. 60). The process of S5204 is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In either the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means, the display means includes a first display means and a power consumption smaller than that of the first display means. 2, and the first display means includes an image forming light emitting means for forming an image on a screen, and the gaming machine displays an image to be displayed on the first display means. Display control means for generating the image data, and at a predetermined timing, the power to the display control means is cut off, the image forming light emitting means is turned off, and the display by the second display means is executed. By Serial display means used to display the stop symbols, from said first display means, said game machine F1, characterized in that it comprises a power saving means for switching to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the second power consumption is lower than the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine F1, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to further save power by cutting off the power to the display control means.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine F1 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generating means of the gaming machine F1 is exemplified by the jackpot generation by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. . Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a 1st display means of the game machine F1, and the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving is illustrated as a 2nd display means of the game machine F1. The In the above embodiment, the image forming light emitting means of the gaming machine F1 is exemplified by the backlight of the third symbol display device 81, and the display control means of the gaming machine F1 is exemplified by the image controller 236.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine F1, the processing of S6313 executed in the power saving mode transition processing processing (see FIG. 74) of the sixth embodiment, external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77). The process of S6417 and S6418 performed in this is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine F1, by supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, turning on the light-emitting means for image formation, and disabling the display by the second display means, the stop The power saving canceling means for switching the display means used for displaying the symbol from the second display means to the first display means, and the display used for displaying the stop symbol by the power saving canceling means. Standby means for waiting for non-execution of display by the second display means for a predetermined period when the means is switched from the second display means to the first display means. A gaming machine F2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F2, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. In this case, the standby unit waits for the non-execution of the display by the second display unit over a predetermined period. Usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control unit that generates image data of an image to be displayed on the first display unit until the display control unit operates normally (returns). It is difficult to return early (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine F2, since the standby unit is configured to wait for a predetermined period of time to make the display by the second display unit non-executed, the player can change the symbol. It is possible to prevent the display such as the display and the stop symbol from being visually recognized, and to save power (that is, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is changed from the first display means to the second display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which interest is impaired due to switching to means). Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the above embodiment, as the power saving canceling means of the gaming machine F2, the processing of S6211 executed in the power consumption mode setting processing (see FIG. 70) of the sixth embodiment and the external interrupt processing (see FIG. 77). The process of S6419 and S6420 performed in it is illustrated. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S6267-S6269, S6270 performed in the symbol display control process for power saving (refer FIG. 73) of 6th Embodiment is illustrated as a standby means of the gaming machine F2.

  In the gaming machine F2, the power saving cancellation unit supplies power to the display control unit by a first power saving cancellation unit that supplies power to the display control unit at a predetermined timing. And a second power-saving canceling means for turning on the image-forming light-emitting means. The standby means supplies power to the display control means by the first power-saving canceling means. A gaming machine F3, which waits for non-execution of display by the second display means for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the switching of the display means by the power saving canceling means is performed by supplying power to the display control means by the first power saving canceling means and then turning on the image forming light emitting means by the second power saving canceling means. Is done. Usually, after power is supplied to the display control means, it takes a certain amount of time for the display control means to start up, but since it does not take time to turn on the light emission means for image formation, the light emission means for image formation By turning on after the power supply to the display control means, the power consumption can be reduced accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the second display means is used to display the stop symbol in a state of being arranged on the front side of the first display means. A gaming machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the position where the stop symbol is displayed does not change. Therefore, even if the display means is switched by the power saving means, the player can easily shift the viewing position.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a front side member operable to switch between a state overlapping the first display unit and a state exposing the first display unit is provided, and the second display Means is provided on the front side member, and the second display means is housed in a state where the display means for displaying the stop symbol is switched to the first display means by the power saving means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F5, when the first display means is used and the second display means is not used, the unused second display means is accommodated and hidden. The person does not care unnecessarily.

  Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5 includes operating means operable by a player, and the predetermined timing is a timing when the operating means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the timing of power saving can be determined according to the operation of the operating means by the player, it is possible to save power as required by the player, and that the player is saving power. Can make you feel.

  In the embodiment described above, the power saving button 23 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine F6.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means, the display means includes a first display means capable of displaying a dynamic display, and a first display means thereof. And a second display means that consumes less power than the display means, wherein the first display means comprises image forming light-emitting means for forming an image on a screen, and the gaming machine comprises the first display means. Display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on one display means, power to the display control means is cut off at a predetermined timing, the image forming light-emitting means is turned off, and the second Display by means of display By executing the power saving means for switching the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means, the power is supplied to the display control means at a predetermined timing. Display means used to display the stop symbol by turning on the image-forming light-emitting means and disabling the display by the second display means. Power saving canceling means for switching from the display means to the first display means, dynamic display pattern storage means for storing dynamic display patterns with different dynamic display periods, and dynamic display pattern storage means The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display according to the pattern of the dynamic display by the first display means, and before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means starts, Pattern selecting means for selecting one dynamic display pattern from among the dynamic display patterns stored in the screen storage means, and the pattern selecting means is a display means used for displaying the stop symbol. Is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, and the dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display executing means in the first display means within a predetermined period. A game characterized in that when started, a dynamic display pattern having a dynamic display period longer than the predetermined period is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. Machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the second power consumption is lower than the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine G1, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-described inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to further save power by cutting off the power to the display control means.

  Furthermore, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. However, usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means until the display control means operates normally (returns). Therefore, it is difficult to return immediately (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine G1, the power saving canceling means switches the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means, and within a predetermined period of time. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period among the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. Is selected. As a result, the dynamic display does not end before the display control means operates normally (returns), and the player can make at least a part of the dynamic display visible. Can be given to players. Therefore, an event in which interest is impaired due to saving power (that is, switching the display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means) Can be suppressed. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  In the gaming machine G1, “the display means used to display the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means within a predetermined period of time. When the dynamic display is started on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is replaced by the second power saving canceling means. The case where the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means at the timing when the display means is switched to the first display means is also included.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine G1 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine G1 is exemplified by the jackpot generation by the jackpot processing (S205) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. . Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a 1st display means of gaming machine G1, and the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving is illustrated as a 2nd display means of gaming machine G1. The In the above embodiment, the image forming light emitting means of the gaming machine G1 is exemplified by the backlight of the third symbol display device 81, and the display control means of the gaming machine G1 is exemplified by the image controller 236.

  In the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine G1, the processing of S6313 executed in the power saving mode transition processing processing (see FIG. 74) of the seventh embodiment, the external interruption processing of the seventh embodiment The process of S6417 and S6418 performed in (refer FIG. 92) is illustrated. Further, as the power saving canceling means of the gaming machine G1, the processing of S6211 executed in the power consumption mode setting processing (see FIG. 70) of the seventh embodiment, the external interruption processing of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 92). The processing of S6419 and S6420 executed in () is exemplified.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, character ROM235 is illustrated as a dynamic display pattern memory | storage means of the gaming machine G1. In the above embodiment, the dynamic display executing means of the gaming machine G1 is exemplified by the variable display process (S608) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 94) of the seventh embodiment. Moreover, in the said embodiment, as a pattern selection means of gaming machine G1, the process of S412 and S416 performed in the variation start process (refer FIG. 85) of 7th Embodiment, the external interruption of 7th Embodiment The process of S6413 performed in a process (refer FIG. 92) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine G1, the stop symbol is constituted by a combination of a plurality of symbols, and the pattern selection means uses a display means used to display the stop symbol as a result of the second power saving canceling means. The combination of symbols as the stop symbol indicating that the occurrence of the special gaming state is selected by the lottery means among the dynamic displays within a predetermined period after switching from the means to the first display means However, when dynamic display including reach display that is established and displayed excluding one of the symbols is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display pattern storage is performed. A gaming machine G2 wherein a dynamic display pattern having a dynamic display period longer than the predetermined period is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, among the dynamic displays, a combination of symbols as a stopped symbol indicating that the occurrence of the special gaming state has been selected by the lottery means is established and displayed except for one of the symbols. In the case of dynamic display including reach display, a pattern having a dynamic display period longer than a predetermined period is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. Therefore, in the case of dynamic display that does not include reach display (that is, dynamic display in which reach display is not performed) among dynamic displays, it is not necessary to select a pattern in which the dynamic display period is longer than a predetermined period. Easy to control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the dynamic display pattern storage means changes the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving release means. When the dynamic display is started on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means within the predetermined period after switching, the dynamic display period selected by the pattern selection means is the predetermined display time. A pattern storage means for return that stores a pattern for dynamic display for return longer than a period, and a pattern corresponding to the pattern for dynamic display stored in the pattern storage for return time, In the case other than the above, it is configured to include a normal pattern storage means for storing a dynamic display pattern selected by the pattern selection means. Tricks machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the display unit used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display unit to the first display unit by the power saving cancellation unit, and the dynamic display is performed within a predetermined period. A pattern selected by the dynamic pattern selection unit when the dynamic display execution unit starts the first display unit (that is, a dynamic display pattern whose dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period). Is stored in the return-time pattern storage means, but the pattern selected by the dynamic pattern selection means is stored in the normal pattern storage means in cases other than the above case. Therefore, depending on the case, the dynamic display pattern may be selected from either the return time pattern storage means or the normal time pattern storage means, so that the control is easy.

  In the above embodiment, the return pattern storage means of the gaming machine G3 is exemplified by the character ROM 235 that stores the return fluctuation display data 235b, and the normal pattern storage means of the gaming machine G2 is normally changed. A character ROM 235 that stores the display data 235a is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the dynamic display pattern storage means generates the special gaming state by the special gaming state generation means after a period longer than the predetermined period and longer than the predetermined period. The pattern selection means stores the display means used to display the stop symbol by the power saving release means. When the dynamic display is started on the first display means by the dynamic display execution means within a predetermined period after switching from the second display means to the first display means, the dynamic display is executed. A gaming machine G4, wherein the return pattern is selected from dynamic display patterns stored in the target display pattern storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the display unit used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display unit to the first display unit by the power saving cancellation unit, and the dynamic display is performed within a predetermined period. When the dynamic display execution unit starts the first display unit, the dynamic display pattern for return is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage unit. . The dynamic display pattern for return is such that the dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period, and the effect that the special gaming state generating means can expect the occurrence of the special gaming state is longer than the predetermined period. Since the pattern is configured to be executed after the period has elapsed, it is possible to make the player visually recognize an aspect in which a special gaming state can be expected to occur, and to give the player high interest it can.

  A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means, the display means includes a first display means capable of displaying a dynamic display, and a first display means thereof. And a second display means that consumes less power than the display means, wherein the first display means comprises image forming light-emitting means for forming an image on a screen, and the gaming machine comprises the first display means. Display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on one display means, power to the display control means is cut off at a predetermined timing, the image forming light-emitting means is turned off, and the second Display by means of display By executing the power saving means for switching the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means, the power is supplied to the display control means at a predetermined timing. Display means used to display the stop symbol by turning on the image-forming light-emitting means and disabling the display by the second display means. Power saving canceling means for switching from the display means to the first display means, dynamic display pattern storage means for storing dynamic display patterns with different dynamic display periods, and dynamic display pattern storage means The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display according to the pattern of the dynamic display by the first display means, and before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means starts, Pattern selection means for selecting one dynamic display pattern from among dynamic display patterns stored in the screen storage means; and display means used for displaying the stop symbol. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means within a predetermined period after switching from the second display means to the first display means, When the dynamic display pattern selected by the pattern selection means is a pattern that ends within the predetermined period, the dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period. A gaming machine G5 comprising a changing means for changing to a dynamic display pattern.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the display means used to display the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the second power consumption is lower than the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine G5, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to further save power by cutting off the power to the display control means.

  Furthermore, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. However, usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means until the display control means operates normally (returns). Therefore, it is difficult to return immediately (immediately). For this reason, the dynamic display started after switching from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means may end before the display control means returns to normal. Yes, in that case, the opportunity for the player to visually recognize the dynamic display is lost, and thus the opportunity for the dynamic display to provide interest to the player is also lost. Therefore, according to the gaming machine G5, the power saving canceling means switches the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means, and within a predetermined period of time. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, if the dynamic display pattern selected by the pattern selection means is a pattern that ends within the predetermined period, The dynamic display pattern thus selected is changed to a dynamic display pattern having a dynamic display period longer than the predetermined period by the changing means. As a result, the dynamic display does not end before the display control means operates normally (returns), and the player can make at least a part of the dynamic display visible. Can be given to players. Therefore, an event in which interest is impaired due to saving power (that is, switching the display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means) Can be suppressed. Therefore, a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.

  One of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine G7 according to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the gaming machine G8 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means, the display means includes a first display means capable of displaying a dynamic display, and a first display means thereof. And a second display means that consumes less power than the display means, wherein the first display means comprises image forming light-emitting means for forming an image on a screen, and the gaming machine comprises the first display means. Display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on one display means, power to the display control means is cut off at a predetermined timing, the image forming light-emitting means is turned off, and the second Display by means of display By executing the power saving means for switching the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means, the power is supplied to the display control means at a predetermined timing. Display means used to display the stop symbol by turning on the image-forming light-emitting means and disabling the display by the second display means. A power saving canceling means for switching from the display means to the first display means, a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display based on the establishment of the start condition by the first display means, and for displaying the stop symbol The display means used for the display is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, and after the elapse of a predetermined period, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display. And a compulsory display means for displaying a predetermined stop symbol prepared in advance according to the result selected by the lottery means before the dynamic display is finished. A gaming machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the second power consumption is lower than the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the lottery result, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated or the player continues to lose, the lottery by the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine H1, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented.

  At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to further save power by cutting off the power to the display control means.

  Furthermore, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. Usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control unit that generates image data of an image to be displayed on the first display unit until the display control unit operates normally (returns). It is difficult to return immediately (immediately), and there may be a halfway effect that can be expected to generate a special gaming state. If the production that can expect the occurrence of the special gaming state is halfway, it becomes difficult for the player to expect the occurrence of the special gaming state from the contents of the dynamic display, which is annoying There is a possibility that the interest of the game may be lost due to adverse effects. However, according to the gaming machine H1, the display unit used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display unit to the first display unit by the power saving canceling unit, and the dynamic unit is activated after a predetermined period of time. When dynamic display is being executed by the display execution means, a predetermined stop symbol prepared in advance according to the result selected by the lottery means is displayed by the forced display means before the dynamic display ends. Is displayed. Therefore, the player can surely know the lottery result at the end of the predetermined period, thereby making it difficult to expect the occurrence of a special gaming state from the contents of the dynamic display (such as production). Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine H1 is exemplified by the process of S604 in the start winning process (see FIG. 17). In the above embodiment, the special game state generation means of the gaming machine H1 is exemplified by the occurrence of a big hit by the big hit process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12) of the main controller 110. . Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a 1st display means of the gaming machine H1, and the symbol display apparatus 181 for power saving is illustrated as a 2nd display means of the gaming machine H1. The In the above embodiment, the image forming light-emitting means of the gaming machine H1 is exemplified by the backlight of the third symbol display device 81, and the display control means of the gaming machine H1 is exemplified by the image controller 236.

  In the above embodiment, as the power saving means of the gaming machine H1, the processing of S6313 executed in the power saving mode transition processing processing (see FIG. 74) of the seventh embodiment, the external interruption processing of the seventh embodiment The process of S6417 and S6418 performed in (refer FIG. 92) is illustrated. Further, as the power saving canceling means of the gaming machine H1, the processing of S6211 executed in the power consumption mode setting processing (see FIG. 70) of the seventh embodiment, the external interruption processing of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 92). The processing of S6419 and S6420 executed in () is exemplified.

  In the above embodiment, the dynamic display execution means of the gaming machine H1 is exemplified by the variable display process (S608) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 94) of the seventh embodiment. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S7603 performed in the display effect process (refer FIG. 94) of 7th Embodiment is illustrated as a forced display means of the gaming machine H1.

  In the gaming machine H1, the forcible display means switches the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving release means. When the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means is being executed and the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means after the predetermined period has elapsed, before the dynamic display is finished. The game machine H2 further comprises displaying the predetermined stop symbol.

  According to the gaming machine H2, when the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means is performed. Is selected and the result selected by the lottery means before the dynamic display is finished when the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display executing means after the elapse of a predetermined period from the switching. A predetermined stop symbol prepared in advance according to the is displayed by the forced display means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the halfway of the production that can be expected to generate a special gaming state with respect to the dynamic display executed before the switching of the display means by the power saving cancellation means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H4 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the gaming machine H5 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display screen (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-174756). In a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, when the start condition is satisfied (for example, winning a ball at the start opening), the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display screen, and the change display stops. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of symbols determined in advance, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. In such gaming machines, various effects (for example, a notice effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, etc.) are performed in order to enhance the interest of the game. In recent years, various effects have been performed using a large number of electrical components (for example, a liquid crystal display screen, a light emitting body such as an LED, a movable body operated by a motor or a solenoid, a speaker device, etc.).
On the other hand, from the viewpoint of environmental protection, awareness of power saving is increasing among players. However, when power is saved by simply reducing the number of electrical components, for example, there is a problem that differentiation due to diversification of production becomes difficult, and the fun of the game due to the production decreases.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can provide a suitable game while saving power.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a player who is in a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. A special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the display, and a display means capable of displaying a stop symbol that suggests a result selected by the lottery means, the display means comprising: A first display unit capable of displaying a dynamic display; and a second display unit that consumes less power than the first display unit. The first display unit forms an image on a screen. A light emitting means for forming an image, and the gaming machine generates display image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means, and supplies power to the display control means at a predetermined timing. Blocking and image formation The display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the first display means to the second display means by turning off the light emitting means and executing the display by the second display means. The power saving means, supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, lighting the image forming light emitting means, and disabling the display by the second display means, thereby stopping the stop symbol. A power saving canceling means for switching the display means used to display the second display means to the first display means, and a dynamic display pattern for storing dynamic display patterns having different dynamic display periods Storage means, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display in accordance with the dynamic display pattern stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means with the first display means, and the dynamic display execution means Pattern selection means for selecting one dynamic display pattern from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means before starting execution of the dynamic display; and the pattern selection The means switches the display means used for displaying the stop symbol from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, and the dynamic display within a predetermined period. When the dynamic display execution unit starts the first display unit, the dynamic display period is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage unit. Select a long dynamic display pattern.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, in which the dynamic display pattern storage means uses display means used for displaying the stop symbol as the second power saving canceling means. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means within a predetermined period after switching from the display means to the first display means, the pattern selection means The selected dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period, and stores a return-time dynamic display pattern, and a dynamic display pattern stored in the return-time pattern storage means. And a normal pattern storage means for storing a dynamic display pattern selected by the pattern selection means in cases other than the above case. It is made.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the dynamic display pattern storage means is longer than the predetermined period and after the elapse of a period longer than the predetermined period. A pattern of dynamic display for return in which an effect in a mode in which the occurrence of a special gaming state can be expected by the gaming state generation unit is executed is stored, and the pattern selection unit is used to display the stop symbol After the display means is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, the dynamic display is changed by the dynamic display executing means within the predetermined period. When the process is started, the return pattern is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the display means used to display the stop symbol is the power saving means, and the power consumption from the first display means from the first display means at a predetermined timing. Switching to the small second display means. Therefore, by using the second display means to display the stop symbol, power consumption can be suppressed (power saving). In addition, since the result selected by the lottery means affects the player's profit, the stop symbol corresponding to the result is a symbol that the player pays particular attention to. Therefore, if such a stop symbol is not displayed, the player is difficult to grasp the result of the lottery, and if the player feels that the tempo of the game has deteriorated, or the player continues to lose, the lottery means There may be inconveniences such as suspicion of whether it was done. However, according to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, since the stop symbol indicating the result (lottery result) selected by the lottery means is displayed on the second display means, the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably prevented. effective.
At this time, the power saving means not only turns off the image forming light emitting means of the first display means but also cuts off the power to the display control means for generating image data of the image to be displayed on the first display means. Therefore, there is an effect that further power saving can be achieved by the amount of power cut off to the display control means.
Furthermore, the display means used to display the stop symbol is configured to be switched from the second display means to the first display means at a predetermined timing by the power saving canceling means. However, usually, a certain amount of time is required from when power is supplied to the display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means until the display control means operates normally (returns). Therefore, it is difficult to return immediately (immediately). Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the display unit used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display unit to the first display unit by the power saving canceling unit, for a predetermined period of time. When the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means, the dynamic display period is predetermined from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. A pattern longer than the period is selected. As a result, the dynamic display does not end before the display control means operates normally (returns), and the player can make at least a part of the dynamic display visible. Can be given to players. Therefore, an event in which interest is impaired due to saving power (that is, switching the display means used to display the stop symbol from the first display means to the second display means) Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that a suitable game can be provided to the player while saving power.
Note that, in the technical idea 1, “the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means within a predetermined period of time. In the case where the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display executing means, the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is changed to the second power saving canceling means by the power saving canceling means. The case where the dynamic display is started in the first display means by the dynamic display execution means at the timing when the display means is switched to the first display means is also included.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the following effects are produced. The dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display executing means within a predetermined period after the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means. When starting with one display means, the selected pattern selected by the dynamic pattern selection means (that is, the dynamic display pattern whose dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period) is stored in the return pattern memory. While being stored in the means, in the case other than the above case, the selected pattern selected by the dynamic pattern selection means is stored in the normal pattern storage means. Therefore, depending on the case, the dynamic display pattern may be selected from either the return time pattern storage means or the normal time pattern storage means, so that there is an effect that the control is easy.
According to the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is produced. The dynamic display is performed by the dynamic display executing means within a predetermined period after the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means. When starting with one display means, a dynamic display pattern for return is selected from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means. The dynamic display pattern for return is such that the dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period, and the effect that the special gaming state generating means can expect the occurrence of the special gaming state is longer than the predetermined period. Since the pattern is configured to be executed after the period has elapsed, it is possible to make the player visually recognize an aspect in which a special gaming state can be expected to occur, and to give the player high interest it can.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
37 1st symbol display device 81 3rd symbol display device (first display means)
83 Second symbol display device 110 Main controller 113 Sound lamp controller 114 Display controller 180 Shutter member 181 Power saving symbol display device (second display means)
226 Speaker device 236 Image controller (display control means)
301 to 304 First to fourth inner peripheral LEDs
305-310 First to sixth outer peripheral LEDs
311 Notification LED
321.322 First and second lower plate LEDs
323 Production button LED
341,342 First and second decorative LEDs
343 to 345 First to third side LEDs
346 Notification LED
347 Start LED
348 Special prize opening LED
361 Movable body for production

Claims (1)

A lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than a normal state when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, and In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of displaying a stop symbol indicating the result selected by the lottery means,
The display means includes a first display means capable of displaying a dynamic display, and a second display means that consumes less power than the first display means, and the first display means includes: Comprising image-forming light-emitting means for forming an image on the screen;
The gaming machine is
Display control means for generating image data of an image to be displayed on the first display means;
In order to display the stop symbol by cutting off the power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, turning off the light-emitting means for image formation, and executing display by the second display means Power saving means for switching the display means to be used from the first display means to the second display means;
In order to display the stop symbol by supplying power to the display control means at a predetermined timing, turning on the image forming light emitting means, and disabling the display by the second display means. A power saving canceling means for switching the display means used in the second display means to the first display means;
Dynamic display pattern storage means for storing dynamic display patterns having different dynamic display periods;
Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display in accordance with the dynamic display pattern stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means with the first display means;
Pattern selection for selecting one dynamic display pattern from the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means is started. Means,
The pattern selection means includes
After the display means used for displaying the stop symbol is switched from the second display means to the first display means by the power saving canceling means, the dynamic display is changed within a predetermined period. The dynamic display period is longer than the predetermined period among the dynamic display patterns stored in the dynamic display pattern storage means when the first display means starts the automatic display execution means. A gaming machine characterized by selecting a display pattern.